Pioneer Elite KURO PRO 111FD Operating Instructions

<ARB1579-C> Printed in China Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright © 2008 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En Register Your Product on http://www.pioneerelectronics.com (US) http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca (Canada)
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER- SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPORTANT D3-4-2-1-1_En-A Read these instructions. K eep these instructions. Heed all warnings. F ollow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water . Clean only with dr y cloth. Do not bloc k any v entilation openings. Install in accordance with the manuf acturer’ s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers , stov es, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not def eat the safety purpose of the polar ized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has tw o blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your saf ety . If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician f or replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being w alked on or pinched par ticularly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where the y exit from the apparatus. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manuf acturer . Use only with the car t, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified b y the manuf acturer , or sold with the apparatus. When a car t is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . Unplug this apparatus during lightning stor ms or when unused f or long periods of time. Ref er all ser vicing to qualified ser vice personnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any w ay , such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the appar atus, the apparatus has been e xposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally , or has been dropped. P1-4-2-2_En 11) 12) 13) 14) IMPORTANT NOT ICE – THE SERIAL NUMBER FOR THIS EQUIPMENT IS LOC ATED IN THE REAR. PLEASE WRITE THIS SERIAL NUMBER ON YOUR EN CLOSED WARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SECURE AREA. TH IS IS FOR YO UR SECURITY. D1-4-2-6-1_En WARNING: Ha ndling the cord on this produc t or cords associated with accessories sold with the product will expose you to chemicals list ed on proposition 65 known to the State of Californ ia an d other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defect or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling D36-P4-A_En PRO151FD.book Page 2 Thursday, July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
3 En TABLE OF CONTENTS Congratulations on your purchase of a Pioneer KURO flat panel televisi on. KURO is the future of Pioneer flat-panel displays. It’s a wo rld without boun daries. A place where the senses e volve, colors are felt and sounds ca n be tasted. An experience that changes not only the way you look at t elevision, but the way you look at the world. We are proud to incorporate this philosophy of exceptional qu ality, state-of-the-a rt design a nd meticulous engineering to make the KURO undeniably uni que and bring you one of the best entertainment experiences possible. P l e a s e t a k e s o m e t i m e t o r e a d t h r o u g h t h i s o w n e r ’ s g u i d e a n d m a n u a l t o l e a r n a b o u t t h e m a n y f e a t u r e s a n d b e n e f i t s t h a t set the KURO apart. We hope you enjoy the experience of owni ng the KURO and in vite you to enter a new world of seeing and hearing like never befo re. TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs ............................................................................. ........ 6 1.1 Flat Panel TV Shipmen t Checklist ........ ............. .......... ............. .......... ........... .......... ........... .... ............... ............... ........... 6 1.2 Control Options: Get to Kn ow Your Flat Panel TV ................. .......... ........... .......... ............. .......... .... ...... ......... ........ ........ 8 1.2.1 Con trol Butto ns and More on the Flat Panel TV .... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........ ... ........ ........ ...... 8 1.2.2 Opera ting the Rem ote Control ..... ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... .......... ........... ... .............. ........ ........ .... 10 1.2.3 Buttons on the Remote Control ......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... ........ ............. ........ ........ .... 12 2 Install Your Flat Panel TV .................................................................................................. .................... 14 2.1 Choose a Loca tion and the Mount ing Method ........... ............. .......... ........... .......... ........... ............ ... ... ......... .......... ...... 14 2.1.1 Che ck the Lo cation fo r Suitab ility ............. .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... ............ ......... ........ ...... 15 2.1.2 Lift and/or Mo ve Your Pane l (the Ho w To’s) ......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ...... .. ......... ........ ........ 15 2.2 Install the Pa nel Using a Stand ...... ............... .......... .......... ........... ............ ........... .......... ...... ....... ........ ........... ........ ........ 16 2.2.1 Use or Remove the Inclu ded Stand .......... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... ..... . ......... ........ ........ .... 16 2.2.2 Con nect the Speaker Cab les ............ ......... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... ............ ......... ........ ...... 22 2.3 Wall/C eiling Mou nting ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... .......... ........ . ........ ........ ........... ...... ........ ...... 23 2.4 Mou nt the Flat Pan el TV ................ ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... .......... ........ .. ......... ........ ........... ........ ........ .. 24 2.5 Attach th e Color Sensor ... ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ...... ... .......... ........ ......... .......... ...... 26 2.6 Connect to Broadca st TV & Other Devices (DVR, Receiver, BD R , etc.) ................. ......... ........ .......... ......... ... ............. 29 2.6.1 Add Analog ( conventional) an d Digital TV C hannels ....... ............ ............. ........ ........... .......... .......... ...... ............. 29 2.6.2 Con nect Your Other Pion eer Equipment ..................... ........ .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ... ...... ........ ........ .... 29 2.6.3 Con nect the Powe r Cord to th e Panel ............ ............. .......... .......... ........... .......... ........... ........ .. ......... ........ ........ .. 32 2.7 Route then Bundle the Po wer Cord a nd Cables ............ ........... .......... ........... .......... ............. .......... .. ........... ........ ........ 32 3 Basic Operations For Television Viewing ..................................................................................... ........ 34 3.1 Turn the Flat Panel T V ON/OFF ..... .............. ........... .......... ............. .......... ........... .......... ......... .. ........ ........ ........... .......... .. 34 3.2 Program the Flat Panel TV for Televis ion Viewing ................. ............ ............. ............ ........... ......... ..... ......... ........ ........ 35 3.2.1 Cho ose Analog or Digital TV Channels ...... .......... ........... .......... ........... ........ .......... ........... ....... . ......... ........ ........ .. 35 3.2.2 Ex plore the Home Menu ... ............ ............. .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........ ........... .............. ......... .......... .... 35 3.2.3 A ssign a Lan guage ............ ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... .......... ......... ........ ........ ...... ... ........ ........ ......... .......... .... 37 3.2.4 S et the Cloc k . ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ .... ....... ........ .......... ......... ........ ...... 38 3.2.5 C reate the List of Chan nels .... ........ ........... ........ ........ ......... ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ... ......... ......... ........ ........ .... 38 3.2.6 Sk ip or Delet e Unwanted Channels .................. ........... .......... .......... ......... .......... ........... ......... ............ ........ .......... 41 3.2.7 C hannel List .. ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ .... .. ......... ........ ......... ........ ........ .... 42 3.3 Quick S tart for Watc hing Television . ................... .. .. ........ ........... ........ ......... .......... ........ ......... ........ ........... ........ ........ .... 44 3.3.1 C hange the C hannel/Su b-Channel ............. ........ ......... .......... ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ .. ......... ........ ........ .. 44 3.3.2 Adjust the Volume /Sound. .......... ............. .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... ........ ........ 44 3.3.3 Tu rn On the Sleep Timer . ........ ........ ........... ........ ........ ......... ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... .. .......... ......... .......... .......... 44 3.4 Adjust the Pic ture and Sou nd Quality .......... ........ ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... ..... ..... ........ ........... ........ .... 45 3.4.1 Adjust the Picture for Yo ur Room Lighting ...... ........... .......... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... .. ......... ........ ........ 45 3.4.2 General Pic ture (Vid eo) Adjust ment fo r an AV S ource ............ ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... ..... .... .......... .... 46 3.4.3 Compar e Images When Adjusting the Pictur e ............... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... .. ................ ..... 47 3.4.4 Display a Graphical Picture/Sound Adjustmen t Screen ...... ........ ......... ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... .. ...... ........ .. 48 3.4.5 S ound Cont rol ......... ......... .......... ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ......... ........ .......... .. ..... ........ .......... ......... ........ ...... 49 3.4.6 General So und (Au dio) Ad justment .......... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... ..... .............. ........ ........ 49 3.5 Block Programs, C hannels, or Content ........ .......... .......... ........... .......... ............. .......... ........... ... ..... ......... ........ .......... .. 50 3.5.1 Assign a Parental C ontrol (Blo ck) Password ................ .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... .......... ........... ........ ...... 50 PRO151FD.book Page 3 Thursday, July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
4 En TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.5.2 Activat e Parental Control ......... ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... .......... ......... ........ .......... ......... .......... ... 51 3.5.3 Assign a Rating System to Create Blocks ............. ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... ..... ... ......... ........ ....... 51 3.5.4 Temporarily R emove a Block ......... ........ ........... ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ........ ..... ............. .......... ....... 54 3.6 Smar t Starts fo r New Ow ners ...... ........ .......... ......... ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ........ ............ ............... .............. 55 3.6.1 Use the TOOLS M enu ............. ........ ........ ......... .......... ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ .... .......... ............. ................ 55 3.6.2 Extend Your Panel L ife ...... ........ ........ ......... .......... ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ....... ...... ........ ........ ......... ........ ... 55 3.6.3 Turn On the Imag e Orbiter ..... ........ ........ ......... ........ ......... ........ ........ ........... ........ ........ ..... ........ ........ ......... .......... ... 56 3.6.4 Trigger the Screen-Saving Video Pa ttern Periodically ... ........ ........ ......... .......... ........ ......... ........ ..... ...... ........ ....... 5 6 3.6.5 Activat e Energy Save to Redu ce Power Usa ge ......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ......... .......... ........ ............... ....... 56 4 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options ........................................................................... 57 4.1 Choose a n AV Op tion (Vid eo, Game , etc.) .............. ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... ...... ........ ......... ........ ......... 57 4.1.1 AV So urce throug h the Remo te Control ........ ............ ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... . ..... ......... ........ ..... 57 4.1.2 Choose an AV So urce throug h the Hom e Menu .... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... .. ................ .. 58 4.1.3 Choose a PC Sour ce .. ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ........... ........ ...... .............. ............... ............ 58 4.1.4 Set the Panel to Recognize a Gam e Console .. ............... .......... ........ ........... .......... ........... .......... .. ....... ........ ......... 59 4.2 Adjust Specific Pic ture Elements ........ ............. .......... .......... ........... .......... ............. .......... ..... .............. ........... ........ ....... 59 4.2.1 Choose a Screen Size (Au tomatically or Man ually) ............. ........ ........... .......... ........... .......... ......... . ......... ........ ... 59 4.2.2 Correct t he Picture for an A V or PC S ource .. .......... ........... .......... ........... ........ .......... ........... ..... ... ......... ........ ....... 61 4.3 Assign Advanced Pic ture Functio ns ......... ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... .......... ........ ....... .... ........ ........... ........ ..... 62 4.3.1 Adjust for Screen Masking (black bars on side s) .............. .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ....... ............ ........ ... 62 4.3.2 Select a PureCinema Level for High Quality Im age....... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ........... ........ ..... ...... ........ ....... 6 3 4.3.3 Select a n Intellige nt Mode Opt ion... ............. .......... ........... .......... ........ ........... .......... ........... .......... ......... ........ ....... 64 4.3.4 Select t he Picture Detail Option s ................. .......... ........... .......... ........... ........ .......... .......... . ........ ......... ........ ........ . 64 4.3.5 Adjust the Colo r Temperatur e ... ........ ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... ........ . ........ ......... ........ ........ . 65 4.3.6 Use CTI and C olor Spa ce ............... ........ ......... ........ ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ ........ ..... ........ ........ ......... .......... ... 66 4.3.7 Use th e Color Mana gement ........... ............. .......... ........... .......... .......... ......... .......... ........... . ..... ........ ......... ........ ..... 66 4.3.8 Reduce N oise from the Image ......... ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... .......... ........... ............ ......... ........ ..... 67 4.3.9 Adjust Color Sign als ................... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... ........ .......... ............. ........ ....... ........ ....... 68 4.4 View in Mu lti-Screen .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ............. .......... .......... ........... ...... ............... .......... ......... ........ ....... 69 4.4.1 Split/Swap /Shift th e Screen ......... ........ ......... ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... ........ ........ ....... ...... ........ ......... ........ ....... 69 4.5 Freeze the Picture .... .......... ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ .... ......... .......... ........ ......... .......... . 70 4.6 Use the Ba nner Feature .............. .......... .......... ............. .......... ........... .......... ........... ........... ............ ........ ......... .......... ....... 71 4.7 Select Alternatives for/to Sound ..... ............................ ............. ......................... .......... ......... ........ ........ ........... ........ ....... 72 4.7.1 Activat e Closed Captioning (CC) ......... ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........... ........ ........ ......... .. ........ ......... ........ ........ . 72 4.7.2 Switch Lang uages Using MTS. ........ ........... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ......... ....... . ........ ......... .......... ..... 74 4.7.3 Select SAP .......... ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... .......... ......... ........ ...... ...... ......... ........ ......... ........ ........ . 74 4.7.4 Apply Sound Effec t Settings ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ......... .......... ........ ........ ... ........ ......... ........ ........ . 75 4.7.5 Use Auto Volum e Control (AVC) ...... ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ......... ....... ... ........ ........... ........ ... 75 4.8 Manage the Powe r ... .......... ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ... ............ ........ ........... .......... ....... 76 5 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV ................................................................................. .. 78 5.1 Program the Remote Control to Operate Othe r Equipment ............ ............... .......... ........... .......... .......... . ........ ........ ... 78 5.1.1 Use the Learning Fea ture . ........ ........ ......... .......... ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ......... . ......... ........ ......... .......... ... 78 5.1.2 Assign a Manufactu ring Code t o the Remote C ontrol ...... ............ ............. ........ ........... .......... ........... .. ........ ....... 79 5.1.3 Issue a Libr ary Search for a Manufactu rer Code .. ......... .......... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... . ........ ........ ....... 7 9 5.1.4 Clear Add ed Manufa cturer Codes from the Remote C ontrol ........... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... .. ........ ... 80 5.1.5 Control a Pioneer Receiver .... .......... ........... ........ .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ......... .......... ........ ......... ........ ... 80 5.1.6 Control a Cable (CBL) or Satellite (S AT) System ... ............. .......... ........... .......... ........ ........... ....... ..... ......... ........ ... 81 5.1.7 Control a Video Cassette Recorder (VCR) ..... ............ ..... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ......... .......... ........ ........ . 82 5.1.8 Control a DVD Player/DVR Recorder/BD Player ......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ..... . ......... ........ ... 83 5.2 Use HDMI In puts ............ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... .......... ... ............ ........ ........ ........... ........ ... 84 5.2.1 Specify the HDMI Input Typ e ........... ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... .......... ......... .......... ......... .......... ....... 84 5.2.2 Specify a Digital HDMI Signal Type ................. .... ........... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ... 85 5.2.3 Specify an Audio HDMI Signal Type .......... .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... .......... ........... .... .. ........ ......... ........ ... 85 5.3 Control Equipment wi th the Panel’s Remote Throug h HDMI ..... ............ ............. .......... ........... .......... ....... ...... ........ ... 86 5.3.1 Control an AV System.. ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... .......... .... ................ ............... .......... 88 5.3.2 Contro l a Recorder ........ ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........ .. ..... .......... ........ ....... ........ ..... 89 5.3.3 Contro l a Player.... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... ........ .......... ........... ........ ............. ........ ......... ........ ........ . 89 5.3.4 Add an AV Amp or a BD Player ....... ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... .......... ........... . ... ........ ......... ........ ..... 90 5.4 Spec ific HDMI Cont rol Comma nds ..... ........ ........... ........ ......... .......... ........ ......... .......... ......... ..... ....... ........ ........... ........ . 91 5.4.1 Play Source Sound Using an HDMI Comm and ...... ......... .... .......... ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ .. .......... ........ 91 PRO151FD.book Page 4 Thursday, July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
5 En TABLE OF CONTENTS 5.4.2 Turn OFF the Powe r With an HDMI Com mand ....... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... .. ........ ........ 91 5.4.3 Turn ON the Power Wit h an HDMI C ommand .. ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... ........ ......... .. ........ ........ 91 5.4.4 Test the Power Cont rol (On/Off) ............ .......... .......... ......... .......... ........... .......... ........... ...... .. ........ ......... ........ ........ 92 5.5 Connect a Game Console or Camc order ...... .......... ........ ......... .......... ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ .. ......... .......... ........ .. 92 5.6 Use th e IR REPEATER OUT ......... ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... .... ........ ......... .......... ........ .. 92 5.7 Operate the Ho me Media Gallery ........... ........... .......... ........... .......... ............. .......... ........... ..... . .......... ......... ........ .......... 93 5.7.1 N etwork Con nections .............. ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........... . ........... ......... ........ ........ .... 94 5.7.2 C onnect a U SB Device .............. ........ ......... ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... .... ........ ......... ........ ........ .. 96 5.8 Run the Home Media Gallery .......... ............ ........... ............ ........... .......... ........... .......... ......... .. ........ ........ ........... ........ .... 98 5.8.1 Sho w Your Mo vie Files on the Fl at Panel TV ............... .......... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... . ...... ........ ........ .. 101 5.8.2 Play You r Music Files on the Flat Panel TV .............. ......... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ... . ......... ........ ........ 103 5.8.3 Show Your Photo File on the Flat Panel TV ............ ............. ............ ........... ..................... .......... ....... ........ ........ .. 104 5.9 Use th e TOOLS Menu ... ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ ........... ........ ........ ... ............ ........ ......... .......... .... 106 5.10 HMG S etup ........ ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... .......... ........ ......... .......... ......... ........ ...... .... ........... ........ ......... .......... ........ 118 5.11 Other useful func tions .. ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ....... ...... ........ ........ ......... ........ ...... 119 5.12 Add Other A udio Equipmen t....... ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... .......... ........ ........ ... ........ ........... ........ ........ 121 5.13 Add a Compu ter (PC) ..... ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... .......... ........ ......... .......... ..... ........ ........ ........... ........ ........ 122 5.13.1 Au tomatic Im age Position and Clo ck Adjustm ents ... .......... ........... .......... ........ ........... .......... .......... .............. . 122 5.13.2 Man ual Image Po sition and C lock Adjust ments ...... .......... .......... ........... .......... ......... .......... .......... ................ . 122 6 Helpful Information ......................................................................................................... .................... 123 6.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) ............... .......... .... ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ........... ... ..... ........ ......... .......... .. 123 6.2 Chec k Your So ftware/H ardware Version .... ........... .......... ............. .......... ........... .......... ........... ...... .. ........... ........ ........ .. 124 6.3 Cleanin g Methods ......... ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ ........... ........ ....... ... ........... .......... ......... .......... .... 124 6.4 Trou bleshooting & Service Informat ion.... ........... ............ ........... .......... ........... .......... ............. ... ... ........ ........... ........ .... 125 6.4.1 C heck the S ignal Stren gth.. ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ........ ..... ........ ........... ........ .... 130 7 Cautions and Warnings....................................................................................................... ................. 131 7.1 Installation Details .............. ........... .......... ........... ............ ........... .......... ........... .......... .. .. ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ .... 131 7.2 Physical Location & Temperature Consideration s .......... .............. ........ ......... .......... ......... ........ ........ ........... ........ ...... 131 7.3 Usag e Guidelines .............. ......... .......... ........ ......... .......... ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ .. ........... .......... ......... ........ .......... 131 7.4 Signal Interferen ce or Noise ... .......... .......... ........... ............ ........... .......... ........... .......... ...... . .......... ........ ......... ............ .. 132 7.5 Phosp hor Properties . ............. .......... ............ ........... .......... ........... .......... ............. .......... .. ..... ........ ........ ............. ........ .... 132 7.6 Image Information Including R etention & A fter-Image Lag ......... .......... ............. .......... ........... .......... .... .......... ......... 132 7.7 Safety Precau tions ............ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... .......... ........ ......... .......... .. ......... .......... ......... ........ .......... 134 7.8 Legal No tices ......... .......... ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ........ ......... .......... ......... ........ ........ 134 7.8.1 S afety ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... .......... ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ... ..... ......... ...... ........ ......... .......... .... 134 7.8.2 Ra dio Interferenc e ......... ........ ........ ........... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ............ ............. . ....... ......... 135 8 Appendix ................................................. ................................................................... .......................... 136 8.1 Ratings Charts (f or Various Audien ce Classificatio ns) ...... ............ ........... .......... .......... ........... ......... . ........... ........ .... 136 8.1.1 TV Ratings (ag e-based) ..... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........... ........ ........ ........ ..... ........ ......... .......... ...... 136 8.1.2 U.S. TV Parental Guideline Rating s (age/c ategory-b ased)... ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ......... ... .......... ..... 136 8.1.3 MPAA Movie Ratings (ag e-based) ..... ........... ........ ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ... ... ......... ........ ........ 136 8.1.4 Ca nadian - E nglish Ra tings (age -based) ...... ............... .......... ........ ........... .......... ........... .......... . ..... ......... ........ .... 137 8.1.5 Can adian - Fren ch Ratings (ag e-based) ..... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ..... ... ......... ........ ...... 137 8.2 Man ufacturer C odes to Pro gram into th e Remote Contro l ................ ............. .......... ........... .......... ......... .............. .... 138 8.2.1 C able ... ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ . ....... ......... ........ ......... .......... ........ 138 8.2.2 S atellite ........ ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ......... .......... ........ ......... ........ . ..... ......... .......... ......... ........ ........ .. 138 8.2.3 VCR ( Brands A - F).. ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ...... .............. ............... ............. 139 8.2.4 VCR ( Brands G - O) ............ .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ....... .............. ......... ........ ........ .. 140 8.2.5 VCR ( Brands P - V) .............. ........ ........... .......... .......... ........... .......... ........... .......... ....... .............. ......... ........ ........ .. 141 8.2.6 VC R (Brands W - Z) ............. ........ ........ ......... .......... ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ .... ........... ........ ....... ........ ...... 141 8.2.7 PVR .......... ........ ........ ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ......... ........ ..... ..... ......... ........ ........ ........... ........ .. 142 8.2.8 BD ( HD-DVD) .... ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ... .......... ........ ......... .......... ...... 142 8.2.9 DVD-R . ......... ........ ........ ......... .......... ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ... ..... ......... .......... ......... ........ ........ 142 8.2.10 DVD (Brands A - N) ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ......... ........ .......... ....... .... ........ ......... ...... ........ .... 143 8.2.11 DVD (Brands O - Z) . ......... .......... ........ ......... ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ...... ..... .......... ......... ........ ........ 144 8.2.12 LD ............... ........ ........ ......... ........ ........ ......... ........ ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ .. ......... ...... ........ ......... ........ ........ .. 144 8.3 Specificat ions ...... ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ......... .......... .. ........ ......... .......... ......... ........ ........ 145 8.4 Glossary .... ......... .......... ........ ......... .......... ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ ........... ........ . ........... ....... .......... ......... ........ .......... 162 8.5 Index .......... ......... ........ .......... ......... ........ ........... ........ ........ ........... ........ ........ ......... .... ........ ........... ........ ......... .......... ........ 164 8.6 Tradem arks, Licenses, & Pa tent Informat ion ............... ....... .......... ........ ......... .......... ......... ........ .... .... ........... ........ ...... 165 PRO151FD.book Page 5 Thursday, July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
6 En 01 Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs 1 Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs The P ioneer ELITE Series Flat P ane l TV m odels inclu de the 60-inch PRO-15 1FD and the 50-inc h PRO-111FD (screen sizes measured di agonally). Below is a list of al l accessories shi pped with you r panel. If an item is missing, please co ntact your dealer or o ur Ser vice organiza tion immediately . Ser vice contact information is listed on the back of this manual. 1.1 Flat Panel TV Shipment Checklist In addition to th e flat panel TV , ther e are several accessories included to ma ke installation quick and easy . Please check for contents before discardi ng or allowing your installer to disca rd any packing material. The PRO-151FD and PRO -111FD shipments have sl ightly di fferent pieces. Identif y the accessories from the appropriate list below . Y ou will need a Philips scre wdriver when mounting the sp eaker and att aching the stand. Shipped with bot h models Remote Control Batteries fo r Remote (2) Cleaning Cloth P ower Cord (2 m /6.6 feet) Cable Clamps (4) Operating Instructions Color Sensor Screws (x 2) (M5 x 8 mm) W arranty Card Color Sensor Bracket (when attached to the top right of the rear panel) Also shipped with the PRO-151 FD (60” panel) S ta n d k i t Base Cover Stand P ipes (2) Bracket (for 50”) Bracket (for 60”) PRO151FD.book Page 6 Thursday, July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
7 En 01 Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs Silver Screws (4) (4×10 mm) F alling P revention Metal Fittings (2) Black Screws (4) (M6×20 mm) Light-Blocking Shi eld Screws to Metal Fittings (4) (M4×35 mm) Sp e ak e r a c ce s so r ie s Speaker Cables (2) Speaker Brackets Speaker Mounting Screws (16) (M5×10 mm) Speaker Also shipped with the PRO- 111FD (50” panel) St a nd k it F alling Pr evention Metal Fittings (2) Screws to Metal Fittings(2) (M4×35 mm) Sp e ak e r a c ce s so r ie s Speaker Cables (2 ) Speaker Brackets Speaker Speaker Mounti ng Screws (16) (M5×10 mm) Also shipped wi th the PRO-151FD (60” panel ) for BOT TOM-Right for TOP -Right for TOP -Lef t for BOT TOM-Left for BOT TOM-Right for TOP -Right for TOP -Lef t for BOT TOM-Left PRO151FD.book Page 7 Thursday, July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
8 En 01 Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs 1.2 Control Options: Get to Know Your Flat Panel TV Y ou can operate your flat panel TV from the panel buttons or with the remo te contro l. The following sections provide button locations/operations fo r the panel and the remote control. 1.2.1 Control Buttons and Mo re on the F lat Panel TV Y our flat panel TV has buttons, indicators, a nd sensors on the lower front bezel with more buttons, toggles, and ports on the panel sides. Refer to the drawings below for specific locations and functi ons. Or , for the back ports and terminals only , check the terminal position sheet located ne ar the panel’s terminal c ompartment to identif y the various optio ns. ELITE Series Model s: Face of Panel 1 - P ower ON indicator 2 - S T A N D B Y i n d i c a t o r 3 - SLEEP indicator 4 -Room Light sen sor 5 -Remote Contro l sensor 6 -Color Sensor 7 -Bezel (some call it the front frame) Command Side of the Panel (left side) 8 -USB term inal 9 -INPUT 7 terminal (HDMI) 10 -PHONES terminal 11 -INPUT 3 terminal (V ideo) 12 -INPUT 3 terminals (Audio) 13 -STANDBY/ON button 14 -INPUT button 15 -V OLUME Up/Down buttons 16 -CHANNEL Up/Down buttons 1 3 4 5 7 2 1 3 2 6 (PRO-111FD) (PRO-1 51FD) 8 9 10 11 15 12 16 14 13 PRO151FD.book Page 8 Thursday, July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
9 En 01 Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs T erminals on side and rear panels are common to both ELITE mode ls. Back of the Panel 1 - A N T t e r m i n a l 2 - PC Input terminal (Analog RGB) 3 - Color sensor terminal 4 - AC In terminal 5 - Ethernet cable port 6 - I N P U T 4 t e r m i n a l ( H D M I ) 7 - I N P U T 5 t e r m i n a l ( H D M I ) 8 - I N P U T 6 t e r m i n a l ( H D M I ) 9 - RC -232C terminal (for factory use) 10 - INPUT 4 terminals (Audio) 11 -INPUT 5 terminals (Audio) 12 -SUB WO OFER OUT ter minal 13 -AUDIO OUT termina ls (Audio) 14 -INPUT 1 terminal (S- Video) 15 -INPUT 1 terminal (Video) 16 -INPUT 1 terminals (Audio) 17 -INPUT 2 terminal (Video) 18 -INPUT 2 terminals (Audio) 19 -INPUT 2 terminals (Component, Y , P B , P R ) 20 -IR REPEA TER OUT terminal 21 -PC INPUT terminal (Audi o) 22 -CONTROL OUT terminal 23 -DIGITAL OUT terminal (Optical) 24 -SPEAKERS (right/lef t) terminal 25 -Speakers (R) terminal (speaker si de) 26 -Color Sensor 27 - Power On button 28 -Speakers (L) terminal (speaker side) 1 2 4 3 (upper bank) 7 8 9 13 12 5 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 20 22 23 10 11 24 6 (middle bank) 25 28 27 26 (PRO-151FD) (lower bank) PRO151FD.book Page 9 Thursday, July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
10 En 01 Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs 1.2.2 Operatin g the Remote Control The remote control for th e ELITE Series panels is a power ful tool. This sectio n provides a brie f introduction to your remote control while later sections explore more advanced operations. Insert the Batteries into the Remote Control T o open push an d slide the batter y cover in the direct ion of the arrow s. Load the supplied two AA si ze batteries by the negative pola rity (–) ends first. The batteries supplied with thi s prod uct may ha ve a shorter life expecta ncy due to storage con ditions. If the remote control seems to be f ailing or is weak, replac e the provided batteries with new alkaline batteries. Never mix old and new batteries. Mixing old and new batteries can shorten the life of new batteries or cause chemical leaks in old ba tteries. Also , mixing different types or brands of batteries can ca use iss ues as b atteries brands have slightly different characteristics. Note: If the flat panel TV ’s remote control is not needed for an extended length of time, remove the batte ries. Remote Contro l Issu es There are several issues that can affect your remote control but the most common problem is weak batteries. W eak batteries in the remote control can cause communica tion to fail or only operate sporadically . In this situation, try movin g closer to the pa nel and attempt to control the panel with the remote. If the panel responds then change the batteries. If moving closer has no effe ct on the panel, check the surroundings for objects that might be blocking the signal. Also cons ider other equipment with remote contro ls that are in the a rea around the panel. Objects and other IR signals can disrupt the remote. F or more help with your remote cont ro l, refer to “6.1 F requently Asked Questions (F AQs).” When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or envi ronmental public institution ’s rules that apply in your countr y/area. PRO151FD.book Page 10 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
11 En 01 Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs Operating Range for the Remote Control T o control the fla t panel TV , point the remote towards the s ensor on the panel’s bottom right corner . F or easy operatio n, keep the distanc e between the remote control and the sensor less than 7 m (23 feet) and at an angle of less than 30 de grees. The remote control may not work properly if the sensor is in direct sunlight or very bright lighting. If your viewing room is naturally bright, chan ge the position of the panel or ph ysically us e the remote control clos er to the pane l’s sensor . Note: If the remote control is lef t sitting in di rect sunlig ht or under a ve r y stron g light, the ca se could warp or deform. 30º Sensor 30º 7 m (23 feet) PRO151FD.book Page 11 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
12 En 01 Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs 1.2.3 Buttons on the Remote Control Except for a few opti ons, commands av ailable through the buttons o n the flat pan el TV are duplic ated on the remote control. The remote control can be programmed to control other equipment such as a DVD Player , Surround Sound system, etc. A later sect ion entitled “5 Use Other Equipment With Y our Fl at P an el TV ” explai ns how to use the remote to control ot her equipment. This section identifies and describes the buttons on the remote control. Remote: Left side buttons (top to bottom, left to right) TV  : T urn On or place panel in Standby 1 INPUT: Select a sou rce (INPUT 1 thru INPUT 7) 2 PC: Select the PC terminal as an input source 3 AV SELECTION: Select audio /video settings A V Source: OPTIMUM, PERFORMANCE, MOVIE, PURE, GAME, SPORT , Standard PC Source: ST ANDARD, USER 4 SPLIT: Cycle vie w thru sing le-screen, 2-scree n, picture-in-picture 5 FREEZE: F reeze a frame from a moving image then press again to cancel the freeze function 6 Number buttons 0 thru 9: Select a channel 7 •(dot): Enter a dot for selecting a sub-channel 8 VOL / –: Set the volume 9 EXIT: Exit the me nu to return to the normal screen 10 Arrow buttons: Navigate the menu screens 11 HOME MENU : Display the HOME MENU 12 Color buttons (Red, Green, Blue , Yellow): Control a BD player for HDMI Control f unctions only 13 HDMI CONTROL: Select the HDMI Control functions 14 SELECT: Select for TV/RCV , CBL/SA T , VCR, or DVD/DVR 15 VOL CH 1 123 456 789 0 CH ENTER CH RETURN EXIT TOOLS SA T GUIDE DVD TOP MENU SA T / DVD MENU HDMI CTRL SOURCE INPUT TV RCV V CR SA T CBL DVR DVD STOP VOL SELECT EDIT/LEARN REC HMG HOME MENU RETURN MUTING TV 2 INPUT TV/DT V DISPLA Y FREEZE SCREEN SIZE AV SELECTION 34 5 PC SPLIT SW AP SHIFT 6 7 ENTER RECEIVER 1 2 34 56 7 8 9 10 12 14 15 13 11 PRO151FD.book Page 12 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
13 En 01 Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs Remote: Right side buttons (top to bottom, left to right) 16 : Lights up all buttons Lights turn off if no operation s are per formed within five seconds. This is used for remote control use in dark locations. 17 TV/DTV: Select ana log or digital T V channels 18 DISPLAY: Display the chan nel inform ation 19 SCREEN SIZE: Select the screen size 20 SWAP: Switch between the two screens when viewing as 2-s creen or pictu re-in-picture 21 SHIFT: Move the location of the small screen when viewing as picture-in-picture 22 CH ENTER : Change the chann el 23 CH RETURN: Re turn to the previous channel 24 MUTING: T urn off the sound while the video conti nues to play 25 CH /–: Cycle throu gh channels 26 TOOLS: Display the TOOLS Menu - refer to “3.6 Smart Starts for New Owners” 27 ENTER: Execute a command 28 RETURN: Re turn to the previous menu screen 29 Player/Recorder Contr ol: Use buttons for control of connected equipment 30 HMG (Home Media Gallery): Display the Home Media Galler y menu Use this button to start record ing (for VCR/DVD recorder only) VOL CH 1 123 456 789 0 CH ENTER CH RETURN EXIT TOOLS SA T GUIDE DVD TOP MENU SA T / DVD MENU HDMI CTRL SOURCE INPUT TV RCV V CR SA T CBL DVR DVD STOP VOL SELECT REC HMG HOME MENU RETURN MUTING TV 2 INPUT TV/DT V DISPLA Y FREEZE SCREEN SIZE AV SELECTION 34 5 PC SPLIT SW AP SHIFT 6 7 ENTER RECEIVER EDIT/LEARN 17 1 8 19 20 21 22 26 2 8 29 30 23 24 25 27 16 PRO151FD.book Page 13 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
14 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV 2 Install Your Flat Panel TV There are several installation opt ions for your flat panel TV . This chapte r walks you through how to choose an installation site, the best mounting me thods, and how to install your panel. 2.1 Choose a Location and the Mounting Method Y our f lat panel TV is ve r y thi n. The panel needs a solid s u r face and some sort of support structure (a stand, table, etc.) to protect it from being tipped over or knocked do wn. Use installa tion accessor ies and parts included with the shipment. P ioneer recommends working with a qualified installer whenever possible. Regardle ss of the mounting method, ancho r or secure yo ur flat panel TV using a combination of the moun ting holes and/or supplied bolts. Note: S ome installation options requ ire a different type of bolt. Check with your i n s t a l l e r o r d e a l e r t o p u r c h a s e t h e appropriate bolt(s). Rear view (PRO-151FD) Side view Mounting surf ace Mounting bracket (or equivalent item) M8 screw 12 mm to 18 mm (0.5 inches to 0.7 inches) T W W W T W W W Rear view (PRO-111FD) Mounting hole Mounting hole Mounting hole Mounting hole PRO151FD.book Page 14 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
15 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV 2.1.1 Check the Location for Suitability When choosing the location for your pa nel, there are several factors you need to keep in mind . The installation site should be out of direct sunlight and have sufficient ventilat ion aro und the flat panel TV to allow cooling. The diagram below is an exa mple of a stand-mounted panel with proper ventilati on. Use the checklist below to judg e possible installation sites. F or specific cautions and safety inform ation , refer to “7.2 Physical Location & T emperature Considerations” and “7.7 Safety Precautions.” 2.1.2 Lift and/or Move Yo ur Panel (the How To’s) This flat panel TV is built for endura nce bu t because of the tec hnology , the panel must be handled with ca re. Use the handles attached to the rear of the flat panel T V to lif t the unit. T o avoi d flexing or twisting the un it, you n eed at least two people to lift and move the panel. Do not move the flat panel TV by holding only a single ha ndle or by dragging the panel by its handl es. Note: Do not use the ha ndles to hang the flat pane l TV or as a nchors to prevent the pane l from slipping or tipping after it is mounted. Sufficient ventilation No danger of power overloads Safe from exce ssive vibrat ions Separate from oth er IR equipment Away from air conditioners P rotected from hits or shocks F ree of moisture or damp ness Distance from heat so urces No danger of splashing wa ter Out of direct sunlig ht Route cords and cables safely Away from strong lighting sources Over 10 cm (3 15 /16 inch es) Over 50 cm (19 11/16 inches) The distance b ehind and above the panel changes depending on your choice of mount. Consult with your dealer or professional installer for proper ventilation. Use the handles to mo ve the panel. Do not move the panel by holding the color sensor, speaker or speaker bracket s. PRO151FD.book Page 15 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
16 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV 2.2 Install the Panel Using a Stand 2.2.1 Use or Remove the Included St and The PRO-111FD ships with the P ioneer table top s tand (stand ) attached. Attach the includ ed stand to the panel for the PRO-151FD. F or PRO-111FD, attach the falling prevention metal fittings after placing the panel to stand upright. Attach the Sta nd to the Panel 1 ) Detach the speaker if it has already been added. Refer to “ Attach/Detach the Speaker ” on page 19 for a ssistance. 2 ) Lay the flat panel TV down on a raised sur face with the stand base hanging over the edge. 3 ) Place al l stand parts on a s of t cloth to a void scratching. If you are mounting the PRO -151FD continue with St eps 4 and 5. If you are mo unting the PRO-111FD skip to Step 7. 4 ) T urn the base cover over so that the bottom is facing up. 5 ) Insert the stand supports ( legs) into the base cover . Please carefully install the supports (lef t and right) so that they are in the correct positions. Misaligned supports can damage the base and/or the suppo rts. 6 ) Tighten the base screws to lock the supports in to place. Note: Assemble the stand with a sof t sheet placed under th e base cover . If a sheet is not laid before asse mbly , the front surface of the base cover may be scratched. Installation screws (M4 × 35 mm: black) F alling prevention metal fitting (PRO-11 1FD) Do not handle the flat panel TV on a wagon or pallet that is smaller than its stand. The stand will bend. Screws (4 x 10 mm: silver) Completed stand Sheet Screws (4 x 10 mm: silver) Front Rear Base cover PRO151FD.book Page 16 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
17 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV 7 ) After assembling the stand, attach the falling prevention metal fittin gs using the installation screws. 8 ) With the flat panel TV still face down, insert the stand’s supports into the bottom of the panel then tighten the screws. 9 ) With the assistance of at least one other person, lift the panel upright then move it in to position. Installa tion screws (M4 x 35 mm: black) (PRO-151FD) F alling prevention metal fitting Line up the column supports with the bottom of the flat panel TV . Insert the stand supports into the flat panel TV so that the arrow marked “FRONT/FACE AVANT” on the bottom of the stand points down. Installation bo lts (M6 x 20 mm) Installation bolts (M6 x 20 mm) PRO151FD.book Page 17 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
18 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV Attach the Light-Blocking S hield Note: Attach the light-blocking shield af ter an chorin g the base cover on a flat stable place. P eel off one side of the double-stick tape on the light-blocking shield and attach the sh ield onto the base cover . Note: Be careful that the light-bloc ki ng shield does not catch on the pi pe insertion holes. Anchor the light- blocking shield so that there are no gaps. If ther e is a gap, the light-blo cking shield may peel off . Conduct after at taching the flat panel TV onto th e stand. Rear F ront Base cover Light-blocking shield Rear F ront PRO151FD.book Page 18 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
19 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV Attach/Detach the Speaker The flat panel TV’s speaker delivers high-quali ty , clear sound. Although other devices can be ad ded or removed from the mounted panel, physically attach the speaker last. Disconne ct the cable s from the Speaker and REMOVE THE SPEAKER before mo untin g or moving the panel. Before attaching the speaker to your moun ted panel, review the information below . • Lay the panel face down on a stable sur face when attaching speaker brac kets. • Use only the s upplied screws and ti ghten securely before stepping away . • Handle the speaker carefully to protect the cabine t and grille net from scra tches and other damage. • Placing a CRT monitor near the speaker can cause a blur on th e flat panel TV . Keep the distan ce between the speaker and the moni tor . Note: Use the foam packing material s to prot ect the equipment from scratches or ot her damage during mounting. Stand-Mounted Pa nel 1 ) Attach the appropriate speaker brackets (left and r ight) to the top and bottom on th e back of the speakers using the supplied screws. • Co nnecting the se speakers to an other panel or dev ice can damage the unit or cause a fire . • When using tone control to increase treble , avoid over- amplifying the volume. Speaker bracket (For BOTTOM-Right) Speaker brack et (For TOP-Right) Screw holes Speaker b racket (For TOP-Right) Place the speaker so its terminals (bottom) are facing you. Speaker bracket (For BOTTOM-Right) Screw ho les (PRO-151FD) PRO151FD.book Page 19 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
20 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV 2 ) Screw a supplied screw into the speaker bracket hole (lower of the two) at th e top, rear of the pane l. Do not tighten it all the wa y yet. Leave it loose, with ab out 5 mm lef t to tighten. Speake r bracket (For BOTTOM -Right) Speaker bracket (For TOP- Right) Screw holes Speaker bracket (For TOP-Right) Place the speaker so its terminals (bottom) are facing you. Speaker bracket (For BOTTOM-Right) Screw holes (PRO-111FD) Top, rear of flat panel TV Top of f lat pan el TV 5 mm Leave a space of about 5 mm Speaker mounting hole PRO151FD.book Page 20 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
21 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV 3 ) Hang the speaker bracket on the screw at the top by pass ing the wide part over it and lowering into the slot; screw in the lower screw temporarily . After passing the wide part of the hol e of the speaker bracket (top) over th e screw , lower the speaker onto it. 4 ) Adjust the position of the speaker then tighten the upper and lower screws firmly . 5 ) T ighten the two screws at the top and bottom for each speaker . 6 ) P ass the supplied speaker cable between the speaker and the pa nel (below the speaker bracket) from below . 7 ) Connect the speaker c ables to the speaker . Ref e r to “ 2.2.2 Connect the Speaker Cables.” (PRO-111FD) (PRO-151FD ) After passing the wide part of the hole over th e screw, lower th e speaker. Tighten with the provided screw the bottom speaker bracket to t he flat panel TV temporarily (one place bottom). After passing the wide part of the hole over th e screw, lower th e speaker. Tighten with the provided screw the bottom speaker bracket to t he flat panel TV temporarily (one place bottom). (PRO-111FD) (PRO-151FD) PRO151FD.book Page 21 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
22 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV 8 ) Insert the cable in the groove on the speaker . 9 ) Connect the other end of the speake r cables t o the rear of the pan el. Ref e r to “ 2.2.2 Connect the Speaker Cables.” Note: If the speaker needs to be reposi tioned (horizontally or vertically) afte r it is attached, loosen the speaker mounting screws first. Adjust the position then retighten the screws. 2.2.2 Connect the S peaker Cables 1 ) Press down on the tab. 2 ) Insert the appropriately colored wire into the opening. 3 ) Allow a small percentage of the ca ble’s bare wire to remain visible. 4 ) Release the tab to clamp the wire. If the bare wire is hidden when the tab is released, repeat Steps 1 through 4 until the proper am ount of cable is showin g. 5 ) Re peat this process for each cable, matc hing the color of the wire to the appropriate terminal. 6 ) Connect the speaker cables to the speaker . 7 ) Bundle the speaker cables, power co rd and other cables in the cable clamp then insert the clamp into an appropriate hole on the rear of the flat panel TV . Re fer to “2.7 R oute then Bund le the P ower Cord and Cables.” Use the clamps as necessar y (see page 33). Speaker cable (PRO-111FD) (PRO-151FD) Speaker terminal Insertion in groove Speaker cable Speaker terminal Inser tion in groo ve tab Gray Speaker cable Gray Black Speaker terminal Black Red Red (PRO-15 1FD) PRO151FD.book Page 22 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
23 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV 2.3 Wall/Ceiling Mounting Lay the 50” panel down on a raised sur face then re move the stand. Speaker cable PRO-151 FD with the speaker in stalled Black Black  Red  Gray Cable clamp ( PRO-111FD ) Cable c lamp • Before connecting the speakers to the flat panel TV , unp lug the panel from the power outlet. Connecting the speaker cable with the power cord plugged in can cause malfunction or damage to the pa nel if the cable’s bare wire touches other equipment. Plug in the power cord after connecting the speakers. • Do not leave speaker cable wires bare and exposed at the terminals. Exposed wires can result in an electrical short causing malfunction or damage to the system. • Do not connect any d evices to the speaker te rminals other than the speakers specified. Installation bolts (1) Installation bolts (2) PRO151FD.book Page 23 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
24 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV A common flat pane l TV mounting option is to hang the pan el on a sturdy wall or from a reinforced ceiling . When m o u n t i n g i n t h i s w a y, s o m e p r e p a r a t i o n s m u s t b e c o m p l e ted fi rst. Follow the s teps below to prepare the panel for mounting. 1 ) Attach the speaker brackets to the speaker (see page 19). 2 ) Attach the speaker to the panel (see page 21). 3 ) Connect the speaker cables to the sp eakers then to t he panel (s ee page 22). 4 ) Connect cables for any other devices to the panel. When decidi ng on a location for yo ur flat panel TV , co nsider other equipment in the room. Equipment suc h as a DVR , Receiver , VCR , etc. requires some way to communicate wi th the panel, eithe r directly or through another de vice. Review the ins tructions th at came with the other equipmen t for available ports and terminals. After deciding which ports and termin als are needed, mark the connections on the flat panel TV for easier identification once the panel is mounted. 5 ) T emporarily bundle loose cables with rubber bands (not incl uded). 6 ) Plug the flat panel TV ’s power cord in to th e panel but do NOT p lug in to the power outlet. 7 ) F ollow installation directi ons provided with your selected wall/ceiling mount. F or details, refer to the operat ing instructions supplied with the wall/ceilin g moun t unit. 2.4 Mount the Flat Panel TV Because your flat panel TV is slim but heavy , have at least two people mou nt and/or position the panel . The following sections provide inst ructions for the di fferent mounting and anch oring options. Anchor the Panel When Using a Stand When using a stand, stab ilize the panel to keep it from tipping over . Plea se use the sup plied me tal fittin gs and screws to anchor the panel to a wa ll or other solid support structure. Another option is to purchase hooks, cords, and fittings through your installe r or from your local hardware store. The hardware size and st rength depends on the compos ition an d thickness of the anchoring surface. Recommended hook: Nominal diameter 8 mm (3/8 inch), lengt h 12 mm to 18 mm (0.5 inches to 0.7 inches) T o anchor the panel w hen using the pr ov ided stand , foll ow the steps below . 1 ) Attach the hook s to th e mounting holes on t he back of the panel. 2 ) Sink the fittings into the wall or sup port structure. 3 ) Run cords between the hooks and the fittings. 4 ) Tighten the cords until th e pane l is anc hored b ut not pulled off balance. (PRO-111FD) Fitting 2. Cord 1. Hook 12 mm to 18 mm (0.5 inches to 0.7 inches) M8 PRO151FD.book Page 24 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
25 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV T o stabilize the flat pane l TV on a table or platform, use the supplied metal fi ttings and screws as well as commercially available wo od screws. The wood screws ar e to anchor the metal fittin gs when mounting on a wooden sur face. These screws should ha ve a nominal diameter of 4 mm (5 /32 inch) and are at least 20 mm (13/ 16 inch) long. Notes: Avoid moving the table af ter the panel is a ttached. Do not use bare wires for the cord. If any part of the wire is introduced in to the ven tilation port on the back of the display panel, fire or electrical shock could result. F ollow the steps below to se cure you r flat panel TV . 1 ) Mark locations for metal fittings and screws on the ba ck edge of the table using the panel stand to determine placement. 2 ) Drill holes in the table or plat form ed ge at th e marked locations. 3 ) Lift panel into place with the assist ance with at least one other person . 4 ) Use wood screws (not included) to secure the metal fittings to the table. (PRO-151FD) (PRO-1 11FD) 20 mm (13/16 inch) min. 8 mm to 15 mm (3/8 inch to 5/8 inch) 4 mm (5/32 inch) Wood screw (comm ercially availabl e, 4 mm x 20 mm (5/32 inch x 13/16 inch) min.) Wood screw (comme rcially available, 4 mm x 20 mm (5/32 inch x 1 3/ 16 inch) min.) PRO151FD.book Page 25 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
26 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV 2.5 Attach the Color Sensor When attached to your panel, the co lor sensor analyses the brightness of the en vironment to automatically optimize the picture qua lity according to the viewing condition . T o activate this function, select OPTIMUM on the A V Selection menu, Mode 1 or Mode 2 on the R oom Light Sensor menu (refe r to “3.4.1 Adjust the P icture for Y our Room Lighting.” W e strongly suggest you attach the color sensor to the bottom right of the front panel. It can be attached to the rear of the panel, but the color sensor ma y not operate properly depending on th e conditions (refer to the Important bullets on page 28). F or the actual pr ocedure, follow the directions below . Note: Do not connect any other external device, su ch as a keyboard to th e color sensor terminal. Do not connect the color sensor cable to a PC. T o clean the sens or window , gently wipe with the supplie d cleaning cloth. Do not use extension cables for the color sensor . Do not disassemble or modify the color sensor . Attach the Color Sensor to the Front Panel (recommended) This is a simple and easy-to - attach meth od using a magnet. 1 ) Attach the color sensor at the bottom right of the front panel using a magnet. 2 ) Attach the color sensor along the bottom edge of the front panel flush with the right side. 3 ) Connect the cable to the color sensor terminal on the rear upper bank but do NOT plug in to the power outlet. Note: Use the cable clamps as necessar y . Magnet (Front) (Rear) Flat panel TV Color sensor Color sensor cable Cable clamp Color sensor Color sensor terminal (upper bank) PRO151FD.book Page 26 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
27 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV Attach the Color Se nsor to the Rear Panel Methods of attaching the color sensor to the rear pane l differ depending on the pane l with or without side- mounted speakers. (when side-mounted speakers are installed) 1 ) R emove the screws of the color sensor then replace the bracket. Use the removed screws again. 2 ) Loosen the upper two (2) speaker bracket screws. 3 ) Fit the color sensor bracket’s lower grooves into the screws. Adjust the color sensor/speaker bracke t positions so as to stay in place. 4 ) F asten the screws. 5 ) Connect the cable to the co lor sensor terminal on the re ar upper bank but do NOT plug in to the power outlet. Notes: Do not loosen the screws at th e bottom of the pane l. When attached to the rear panel, the sensor window points upward. If the color sensor attached to the rear panel does not operate p roperly , attach it to the front pa nel. Do not use the supplied screws when attachin g the color sensor using the speaker brackets. The color sensor may become hot due to a heat em itted from the panel. When using it in a high- temperature environment, atta ch the colo r sensor to th e bottom of the front panel. (Bracket for PRO-151FD) The bracket is for PRO-151FD panel but th e procedure is the same for PRO-111F D. Color sen sor c abl e Cable clamp Color sensor terminal (upper bank) Cable clamp Color sensor Speaker cable PRO151FD.book Page 27 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
28 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV (when side-mounted speakers are not installed) 1 ) Remove the screws of the color sensor then replace the bracket. Use the removed screws again . 2 ) Finger tighten the suppl ied color sensor screws in the speaker screw holes. 3 ) Fit the color sensor bracket’ s lower grooves into th e screws. Adjust the bracket position to stay in place. 4 ) F asten the screws. 5 ) Connect the cable to the color sensor terminal on the rear upper bank but do NOT plug in to the power outlet. Important The color sensor may not operate properly : • if att ached by methods oth er than sp ecified above • if anything blocks ligh t fa lling on the sensor window • if light f alls on only part of the sen sor wind ow • if the lig ht fallin g on the sens or window and the panel screen differs Notes: If the color sen sor attached to the rear panel does not operate prop erl y , attach it to the front panel. The color sensor may become hot due to a hea t em itted from the panel. When using it in a high- temperature environment, atta ch the color sensor to the bottom of the front panel. Do not use t he screws su pplied for the speakers. The bracket is for PRO-151FD panel but the proce dure is the same for PRO-11 1FD. PRO151FD.book Page 28 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
29 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV 2.6 Connect to Broadcast TV & Other Devices (DVR, Receiver, BDR, etc.) The type of equipment attached to your flat panel TV determines whic h panel ports are used. T he following sections explain how to connect broa dcast TV and playback equipment su ch as a DVD player , Surround Sound system, video recorder , etc. to the panel. If your equipment is not listed, plea se refer to the operating i nstructions that came with the devi ce(s) for connection assist ance. 2.6.1 Add Analog (conventional) and Digital TV Channels Whether a TV station b roadcasts in Anal o g o r D i gi ta l, yo u r f l a t p an el TV s h ows the programs as long as the panel is programmed to accept the signal. T o program yo ur panel for broadc ast TV , select terminal ANT . The ANT terminal acc epts both analog and digital broadcasts. Connect a VHF/UHF antenna and/or cable TV to the panel’s rear ANT terminal, then press TV/DTV on the remote control to toggle be tween analog and digital broadcasts. Whe n watching analog TV c hannels, you can also use an outdoor an tenna for the clearest anal og picture. If your outdoor antenn a uses a 75- ohm coaxial ca ble with an F-type connect or , plug it into the panel’s a ntenna terminal on the back. 2.6.2 Connect Your Other Pioneer Equipment This section provides cabling information for your other P ioneer equip ment when combine d with the panel. E ach diag ram can also be used as a reference tool for non-P ioneer devices but port locations may differ or b e unavailable. Connect cable or Satellite using STB (S et Top Box): T W T W In order to watch both analog and digital broadcasts through your terrestrial antenna or cabl e connection, you must first connect the antenna cable to a splitter . Rear view When using a cable STB or Satellite STB, plug in to the a nte nna /cab le TV wa ll outlet using the STB cable provided with your STB. If your STB has an HDMI terminal, use an y of INPUT 4 through INPUT 6 (HDMI terminal) on the rear or INPUT 7 (HDMI ter minal) on the side of the flat panel TV instead of making video connections. If you connect an antenna cable directly to TV , you must first connect the cable to a sp litter . F o r details, refer to the operating manual that came with the STB. IN HDMI OUT OUT AUD IO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT Y P B P R T W T W IN HDMI OUT OUT AUD IO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT Y P B P R SAT IN Rear view Satellite antenna Cable STB /Satellite STB Cable S TB/Satellite ST B PRO151FD.book Page 29 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
30 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV Connect HDMI eq uipment (INPUT 4 through INPUT 6): Connect HDMI equipment ( INPUT 7): Connect a DVD player: Connect an AV receiver: T W T W T W T W HDMI equipment HDMI compliant cable (HDMI cable having the HDMI mark ) Rear view INPUT 4 through INPUT 6 are HDMI terminals. Use INPUT 4 or INPUT 5 (HDMI) terminal when you also input analog audi o signals. F or details, refer to “5.2 Use HDMI Inputs.” Audio cable (comme rcially available) Make this connection when inputting analog audio signals. HDMI comp lian t cable (HDMI cable having the HDM I mark) Also use INPUT 7 (HDMI termin al) on the side of the panel when connecting HDMI equipme nt. For details , refer to “5.2 Use HDMI Inputs.” Left side view HDMI equipment T W T W Use INPUT 2 terminals when connecting a DVD player or other audiovisua l equipment. If your DVD player has an HDMI terminal, use this connection instead of making video connections. For details, refer to the operation manual th at came with the DVD player . DVD player Component video ca ble (commercially available ) AV cable (commercially available) Rear view T W T W Use an op tical di gital cab le to connect an A V receiver to DIGIT AL OUT termina l (optical). If yo ur AV rec eive r does not have a DIGIT AL IN term inal (optical), you may connect the pa nel’s AUDIO OUT termi nal (audio) to the audio input termin al on the AV receiver . For details, refer to the operati on manual that came with the AV rec eiver . This connection is not required when connecting an AV amp equipped with the surround function to a subwoofer . Optical di gital cable (commercially availabl e) Subwoofer AV cable (commerciall y available) Rear view AV receiver PRO151FD.book Page 30 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
31 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV Connect a VCR: Connect a game console or camcorder: Connect control cords: Connect a PC: T W T W Use INPUT 1 terminals when connecti ng a VCR or other equipment. F or details, refe r to the operation manual that came with th e VCR. VCR S-Video cable (commerc ially available) AV cable (commercially availabl e) Rear view Use INPUT 3 terminals when connecting a game console, camcorder or othe r audiovisual equipment. F or details, refer to the operation manual that came with the game console or camcorder . Left side view AV cable (commercially available) Camcorder/Game console T W T W CONTROL IN OUT Rear view Connect cont rol cords betw een the panel’s CONTROL (OUT) terminal and ot her P ioneer equipment having the SR logo . Use a mono sound cable with a mini plug (not provided). T W T W Personal computer Rear view Use the PC INPUT terminal (Analog RGB) when connecting a PC. If you also conne ct PC audio, use PC INPUT (Audio) with a stereo sound cable with a mini plug (not provided). For deta ils, refer to the operation manual that came with the PC. Stereo sound cable with a mini plug (commercially available) (When PC audio is connected) RGB cable (commercially available) PRO151FD.book Page 31 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
32 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV 2.6.3 Connect the Power Cord to the Panel The final connection is the power cord . Always connect the panel’s power cord to a three-pron ged outlet, verifying that the cord is properly gr ounded. The cord includes a no ise filter that reduces electr ical inter ference from the wall ou tlet. As long as the flat panel TV is plugged in to an out let, some power is drawn through t he panel. When the flat panel TV is not going to be used for a long period, unplug the panel from the power outlet. Unplugg ing the panel extends the life of the plasma as well as save s energy . Plug the cord in to the panel but do NOT plug it in to a power outlet yet. 2.7 Route then Bundle the Power Cord and Cables Once the flat panel TV is mounted and the speaker is attached, place additional equipment in the final position(s). Lay out the power cord, panel cables an d any other device cables in a logical pattern that works for the location . Please consider the following points when routing cables: • Access to a 3-prong (groun ded) power outlet • Space for the noise filter betwee n the panel and outlet • Place ment of cables u nder carpet s or acros s walk ing paths Usually the cord/cables have slack or are too long. Although rubber bands are a good temporar y solution to bundle cables, they tend to break do wn too quickly . T o keep cables organized and neat, use the included cable clamps to bundle cables. The diagram below shows a bundled speaker cable. A reusable cable clamp is designed to lo ck the bundle d cables in place. Y our fl at panel TV has a total of four hol es to attach cable clamps to the back of the panel. Use the cable clamps as necessar y . T W T W Speaker cable Cable clamp (PRO-1 51FD) T W T W (PRO-1 11FD) Speaker cable Cable clamp Bundle cables in small groups when possible for easier separation later, if necessary. PRO-151F D PRO-111 FD PRO151FD.book Page 32 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
33 En 02 Install Your Flat Panel TV F ollow the steps below to attach a cable clamp. 1 ) Thread the clamp band through the holder and bundle the cable(s) in the cable clamp. 2 ) P ush and hold the levers then inse rt the hook into an a ppropriate hole on the rear of the flat panel TV . 3 ) P ull up the clamp band to lock. 4 ) Confirm that the cable clamp is seated firmly in the panel. Note: Avoid pinching or creat ing pressure points when routing or bundling cables. T o remove the clamp band, pull and hold the latch to release. T o remove the cable clamp, push and hold th e levers then pull it out from the hole. Note: The long er a clamp is in plac e, the better chance of deterioration . An older cl amp is m ore easily damaged while being removed and may no t be reusable. 1 2 Cable clamp Latch Lever Lever PRO151FD.book Page 33 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
34 En 03 Basic Operations For Television Viewing 3 Basic Operations For Television Viewing This chapter explores day-to-day oper ations such as powering on your flat pa nel TV , using the Home Menu, and adjustin g the panel f or the vi ewing area/room. The final section in this chapter provides hints and suggestions for those new to flat panel TV feature s. 3.1 Tur n the Flat Panel TV ON/O FF Y our flat panel TV has three activity levels: P ower On, Standby , and P ower Off . Standby saves energy but allows the remote control to turn on the panel. The following inst ructi ons use the remote contro l. T o operate the flat panel TV through the side panel bu ttons, refer to “1.2.1 Cont rol Buttons and More on the Flat P anel TV ” for button locations. Turn ON the Flat Panel TV T o turn on the panel, follow the steps below . 1 ) Plug the flat panel TV ’s power cord in to a properly grounded outlet. 2 ) P ress any of the following buttons to turn the flat panel TV On. • Power On button ( a ) on the panel’s back in lower-left section (see page 9) • STANDBY/ON button on the side of the panel (see pa ge 8) • Remote control’s TV ( a ) b utton lo cated i n the u pper left c orner ( see page 12). Images appear on the panel screen. Note: Use the remote control’s MUTING button to reduce any excessive static noise. 3 ) Confirm that the P ower ON indicator lights blue. Note: While in Standby , pressing the remote control’s TV ( a ) button causes the flat pan el TV to turn On. Turn OFF the Flat Panel TV T urning off the flat panel TV ca n mean entering Standby so features such as Sleep are still fun ctional or it can mean cutting power to the panel. Unless th e flat panel TV is to sit idle for lo ng periods, leave the panel in Standby . Note: While in Standby or when powered off , the flat pan el TV continue s to draw some power as long as th e panel is plugged in to an outlet. F ollow the steps below to place the panel in Standby . 1 ) P ress the remote control’s TV ( a ) butt on or panel’s STANDBY/ON butto n. 2 ) Confirm that the Standby indicator lights red. The table to the right prov ides samples of how the indicators light. Monitor the indicators On the front of the panel to check the power status. Note: Select from Auto, High, Mid and Low . Selecting Auto toggles the brightness of the P o wer On indicator between Hi gh, Mid and Low to match the brightness level of the vi ewing area. Refer to “Blue LED Dimmer ” (page 46). Power On Indicator Standb y Indicator Flat Panel TV Status P anel’s power cord is disconnected or the power cord is connected but the fl at p a n el T V ’ s Pow er O n bu t t o n ( a ) is off P ower is on but waiting for activation P anel is in Standby Po w e r O n in d i c at o r Standby i ndicator Sleep indicator (PRO-11 1FD) PRO151FD.book Page 34 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
35 En Basic Operations For Television Viewing 03 3.2 Program the Flat Panel TV for Television Viewing T o watch T V and take advantage o f some built-in featur es , choose the channel type or types (Analog, Digital), select a languag e, set your time zone, and program the channel s. The sections belo w incl ude how to set you r channel type and how t o use the Home Menu for each programming option. 3.2.1 Choose Analog or Digital TV Channels T o choose a channel setting, note the antenna input te rminal connected to the back of the panel. Follow the directions below to select an alog or digital TV channels. Note: When watching TV and separate video imag e (multi-screen), pressing the remote control’s TV/DTV button changes on ly the TV sign al appearin g on the left side of the panel. 3.2.2 Explore the Home Menu The Home Menu is the main menu for the flat panel TV . Most commands and settings are programm ed through this menu. The following section describes a typical me thod for working with the panel’s menu s. F or actual procedures, see the appropriate pa ge(s) that describe a function . 1) Confirm that the remote control is set to TV . Located at the bottom of the remote control. 2) P ress TV/DTV on the remote control. Located at the top of the remote control. 3) Select a channel option , analog or digital. During operation, press TV/DTV to toggle between TV signals. Note: See “2.6.1 Add Analog (conventional) and Digital TV Channels” for more informat ion about channel setting options. 1) P ress HOME MENU on the remote to access the main menu. 2) Use the Up/Down arrows ( / ) to highlight a menu item. 3) Use the Left/Right arrows ( / ) to scroll through opt ions for that menu item. 4) Highlight the selected menu option . 5) P ress ENTER to lock in the change. 6) P ress RETURN to move back to a previous menu/submenu page when changing more than a single op tion. 7) P ress HOME ME NU again to ex it the menu screen . EDIT/LEARN INPUT TV RCV VCR SA T CBL DVR DVD SELECT 1 TV 2 INPUT TV/DT V DISPLA Y SCREEN SIZE AV SELECTION 34 5 PC 67 SAT GUIDE DVD TOP MENU SAT / DVD MENU HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Channel Fa vorites Input Home Media Gallery HDMI Control Setup Remote control Home Menu screen PRO151FD.book Page 35 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
36 En 03 Basic Operations For Television Viewing This chart provides a breakdown of the Home Menu for both A V and PC sources. AV Source Pg Option Channel 42 — Favorite s 42 — Input 42 — Home Media Gallery 93 — HDMI Control 86 — Setup Picture 57 AV Select ion 61 Contrast* 61 Brightness* 61 Color* 61 Tint* 61 Sharpness* 64 Pro Adjust* 63 PureCinema** 49 Sound Control*** 48 OPTIMUM Performance*** 61 Reset Sound 49 Trebl e 49 Bass 49 Balance 75 Sound Effect 49 Reset 75 AVC Power Control 56 Energy Save 76 No S ignal off 76 No Op eration off Sleep Timer 44 — Option 47 Position 59 Auto Si ze 62 Side Mask 84 HDMI Input 91 HDMI Control Setting 46 Blue LED Dimmer 56 Orbite r 56 Video Patt ern 59 Game Control Pref 45 Room Light Sensor 55 Screen Protectio n 43 Label Input System Setup 38 Auto Installat ion 39 Analog T V Setup 41 Digital Tuner Setup 50 Parental Control 72 Closed Captions 121 Digital Audio Output 50 Change Password 37 Language 124 Technical Info Favorites Setup 42 Channel Mode 43 Sort Favorites * Available when an y option other than OPTIMUM is selecte d from the AV Selection menu. ** Access this option throu gh the Pro Adjust menu when any opti on other than OPTI MUM is selected from the AV Selection menu. *** Available only when OPTIMUM is selected f rom the AV Selection menu PC Source Pg Option Channel 42 — Favorite s 42 — Input 42 — Home Media Gallery 93 — HDMI Control 86 — Setup Picture 57 AV Select ion 61 Contrast 61 Brightness 61 Red 61 Green 61 Blue 61 Reset Sound 49 Trebl e 49 Bass 49 Balance 75 Sound Effect 49 Reset 75 AVC Power Control 56 Energy Save 77 Power Management Sleep Timer 44 — Option 122 Auto Setup 122 Manual Setup 84 HDMI Input 91 HDMI Control Setting 56 Orbite r 43 Label Input Favorites Setup 42 Channel Mode 43 Sort Favorites PRO151FD.book Page 36 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
37 En Basic Operations For Television Viewing 03 TV Screen Component s Y our flat panel TV has easy- to -read menus and graphic s y mbols that p rovide quick acce ss to the desired options. Menus app earing in th is manua l may diffe r slightl y fr om the actual menus but the fu nctionality remains the same. 3.2.3 Assign a Language The default menu language is English. T o assign a di fferent language for menus and on-screen information, follow the steps below . 1 ) P ress HOME MENU . 2 ) Select Setup from the main menu. Use the arrow buttons to high light an option then press ENTER . 3 ) Select System Setu p from the Setup menu. 4 ) Select Language from the System Setup menu. 5 ) Select a language from the submenu. 6 ) P ress HOME MENU again to exit the menu. 1 - Exit button: Close the menu to return to TV viewing 2 - Menu title: Display the selected menu title 3 - TOOLS button: Display the TOOLS Menu 4 - Menu: Select an option 5 - HOME MENU button: Close the menu to return to TV viewing 6 - Operation Guide area: Display the operational guidelines for the sele cted option(s) 7 - Return button: Return to the previous menu screen 8 - P icture preview (in reduced size) Exit HOME MENU Return T reble : 0 Bass : 0 Balance : 0 Sound Effect : Reset A VC : Off xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TELEVISION Sound 1 4 8 2 3 5 6 7 Menu : English PRO151FD.book Page 37 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
38 En 03 Basic Operations For Television Viewing 3.2.4 Set the Clock Set the flat panel TV ’s clock to take advantage of many bu ilt -in features su ch as Time Zone and D.S.T . (Daylight Saving T ime) activation for digi tal TV broadcast. Note: If the panel’s power cord is unplugged or th ere is a power outage, the time must be reset. F ollow the steps below to set the clock. 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup . 2 ) Select Digital T uner Setup from the System Setup menu. 3 ) Select Clock from the Digital T uner Setup menu. 4 ) Select Tim e Z on e from the options. 5 ) Select the time zone for your area. 6 ) Select the menu option D.S.T . to activate/deactivate Daylight Sa ving Time. 7 ) Select the proper option for your location. 8 ) P ress HOME MENU to close the menu and exit. 3.2.5 Create th e List of Channels This section desc ribes how to search for and set up TV channe ls. There are two ways to add channel s to your flat panel TV , Auto Installation for automatic channel selectio n or manual ch annel assignme nts. The Auto Installation adds all available channels fr om your selected TV provider . Once all cha nne ls are added to the list, simply delete any unwanted channels. This section pr ovides steps to add/remove channels. Auto Installation Auto In stalla tion se arches f or and ad ds TV ch annels to your list of v iewab le chan nels. U sing th e remote control, follow the steps below to automati cally select all avai lable channels. 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup . 2 ) Select Auto Installa tion from the System Setup men u. 3 ) Select Air/Cable, Language , or Tim e Z o n e from the Auto Installa tion menu. 4 ) Select an option. • Signal type: Air or Cable • L anguage: English , Français or Español •T i m e Z o n e : Atlantic , Eastern , Centra l , Mountain , Pacific , Alaska , or Hawaii Time Zone : Atlantic D.S.T . : On PRO151FD.book Page 38 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
39 En Basic Operations For Television Viewing 03 5 ) Select Start. The panel automatically begins cr ea ting your list of channels. Note: T o quit Aut o Insta llation b efore i t is co mplete, press RETURN to recall the Auto Inst allation sc reen then EXIT . Manual Channel Selection T o add channels without using the Auto Installation opti on, follow the directions below . Also, if a channel is skipped in error , use this method to add the ch annel to your list. 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup . 2 ) Select Analog TV Setup from the System Setup menu. 3 ) Select Manual Adjust from the Analog TV Setup menu. 4 ) Select Pr o g r a m En t r y . 5 ) Select a chan nel number to be added. Use the arrow buttons ( /) to enter a channel number . 6 ) Select Store from the Manua l Adjust menu. 7 ) Select Ye s from the submenu. 8 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu after a ll wa nted ch annels have been ad ded. Note: Analog c hannels can be added manually but digi tal channels can on ly be added using the Add New Channels button on the Digital T uner Setu p menu. Add New Channels T o add new channels, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup . 2 ) Select Digital T uner Setup from the System Setu p menu. Start Language : English Air/Cable : Cable Time Zone : Atlantic Program Entry : 1 Store : Y es T uner NR : On PRO151FD.book Page 39 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
40 En 03 Basic Operations For Television Viewing 3 ) Select Installation from the Digital T uner Setup menu. 4 ) Select Add New Channels . Channel search starts automatically . If a new channel is found, it is stored auto matically i n the flat panel TV . T o cancel channel search before it finishes, press RETURN . Software Key board This on-screen keyboard a llows labeling manuall y adde d TV channels. Channel labels ca n be up to eight characters long to he lp channel identification. T o use th e Sof tware Keyboard for labeli ng TV channel s, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup . 2 ) Select Analog TV Setup from the System Setup menu. 3 ) Select Label from the Analog TV Setup menu. 4 ) Select P rogram Entry from the submenu. 5 ) Select a program number . • Cable: 1 through 135 • A ir: 2 throug h 69 6 ) Select Label . The Sof tware Keyboard screen appears. 7 ) Select the first character . The cursor moves to the next chara cter space. 8 ) Repeat the previous step to enter up to e ight characters. • T o change a character , use  or  to highlight the character then press ENTER . The cursor moves to the previous or next characte r . • T o delete the entered characte r , highlight the character , select Delete then press ENTER . • T o put a spac e af ter the entered ch aracter , highlight the sp ace, select Space then p ress ENTER . • T o toggle between upper case and lower case, high light the charac ter , select Caps then press ENTER . Installation Channel management Clock I NPU 1234567890 ABCDE F GH I J K LM NOPQRS T U VWX Y Z , . : ; &' ( ) - * /_ @ OK Cancel Caps Space Delete Label PRO151FD.book Page 40 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
41 En Basic Operations For Television Viewing 03 9 ) Select OK then press ENTER . The entr y is complete. 10 ) P ress HOME MENU to ex it the m enu. 3.2.6 Skip or Delete Unwanted Channels The Auto Installation process ad ds al l channels availa ble from your TV se r vice provider . However , there may be some channels t hat are unwanted or are not age-appropriate for your ho me. This section explains ho w to bypass or delete unwan ted channels when movin g up/down one ch annel at a time and what programs are available for viewing. T o skip or delete unwanted channe ls, use the remote’s CH / CH– buttons to reset the status for those ch annels. F ollow the steps below to ch ange a channel’s status. 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup . 2 ) Select Digital T uner Setup or Analog TV Setup from the System Setup menu. • Digital TV channels: Channel management > Channel Options > (C hannel Delete) > (On) 3 ) S croll to or highlight an unwanted ch annel number . 4 ) P ress ENTER to reverse the status for that channel. When there is a check mark next to the channe l, it disappears. 5 ) P ress RETURN . A confirmation screen appears. 6 ) Select Ye s then press ENTER . The Channel Delete setting is complete. 7 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. If you select the (Channel Skip) op tion in Step 3, the se tting is complete when ex iting the Channel Options menu (no conf irmation scr een appears). Skip Steps 5 and 6. The instructions for restoring a skippe d channel are the same as above. In Step 4 a check mark appears next to the added/restored channel. T o skip an analog channel, follow the steps below . • Analog TV cha nnels: Manual Ad just > Store > No Radio Skip This function allows skipping of radio channels at a time. T o set this option, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup . 2 ) Select Digital T uner Setup from the System Setu p menu. 3 ) Select Channel management from the Digital T uner Setup menu. 4 ) Select Rad i o S ki p from the Chan nel management menu. 5 ) Select On . 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. XXXX 00001.000 XXXX 00002.000 XXXX 00003.000 XXXX 00004.000 XXXX 00005.000 XXXX 00006.000 XXXX 00007.000 XXXX 00008.000 XXXX 00009.000 PRO151FD.book Page 41 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
42 En 03 Basic Operations For Television Viewing 3.2.7 Channel List Y our flat panel TV offers three channel lists for quick access to a desired channel: F a vorites List, Channel List and Input List. F avorites List: Display your favorite channel numbers/name s up to 20 ch anne ls (analog channels , Input 1 throug h 7, PC), 20 digital channels , and 1 Home Media Galler y (top screen, see page 98) Store your most frequently viewed channels in the F avorites List. T o display the F avorites List, press ENTER while showing a TV channel. F or another method to acce ss the F avorites List, follow the directions below . 1 ) P ress HOME MENU . 2 ) Select Fa v o r i t e s from the main menu. P ressing the / button while showing the Channel List or In put List also causes the F avorites List to appear . Channel List: Display all an alog/digital TV channels in e ach broadcast netwo rk group T o display the Channel List, f ollow the directions below . 1 ) P ress HOME MENU . 2 ) Select Channel from the main menu. P ressing the / button while showing the F avorites List or In put List also causes the Chan nel List to appear . Input List: Display external input source names from INPUT 1 th rough INPUT 7 and PC T o display the Input List, follow the directions below . 1 ) P ress HOME MENU . 2 ) Select Input from the main menu. P ressing the / button while showing the F avorites List or Channel List also causes the Input List to appear . Note: After selecting the desired channel, pressing ENTER causes the Channel List to close and the selected screen appears. P ressing RETURN or EXIT causes the Channel List to close and the screen before selection returns. P ress an arrow button to cycle through the lists when viewing any of the lists. Set Favorite Channels Select up to ten (10) chan nels per list page, up to five pages for a total of 41 favorite channels . T o assign channels to your Fa v o r i t e s or All , follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the F avorites Setup through the Setup. 2 ) Select Channel Mode from the F avorites Setup menu. 3 ) Select All or Fa v o r i t e s from the Channel Mode menu . • T o assign all channels, select All. T o assign the registered channels, select F avorites. INPUT 6 XXXXXX 00001.000 XXXXXX 00004.000 XXXXXX 00007.000 XXXXXX 00009.000 PC XXXXXX XXXXXX 00013.002 XXXXXX 00015.000 XXXXXX 00024.000 1/2 Fav orites PRO151FD.book Page 42 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
43 En Basic Operations For Television Viewing 03 4 ) Select a TV channel to store. If the screen fails to fit in the window , a scroll bar appears. Pr e s s i n g ENTER while watchi ng a TV program also causes th e favorite channel list to appear . If the F avorites list is empty , “No F avorites List.” appears. 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Alternate Method to S tore your Favorite Channels Use the TOOLS Men u to store TV ch annels, external input sources including PC, and Home Media Galler y contents. T o store channe ls, follow the steps below . 1 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Me nu appears on sc reen. 2 ) Select F avorites Entr y . Use the arrow button s to highlight an option . 3 ) Select On ( / ). The channel you are watching is stored in the favorite list. T o cancel, use th e arrow butto n to select Off . Notes: •P r e s s i n g EXIT, RETURN , or TOOLS again causes th e TOOLS Menu t o disappear . • Once the maximum number of channels are stored, a warning scr een appears. • T o quit the procedure before it finishes, press EXIT or RETURN on the remote control. Sort Favorite Channels T o sort theough the store chan nels, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Fa v o r i t e s S e t u p through the Setup . 2 ) Select Sort F avorites from the F avorites Setup menu. 3 ) Select a channel to move. 4 ) Select a new location then press EN TER . The selected channel i s moved to the new location. T o so rt another channel (s), repeat Steps 3 and 4 . 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Edit the Input List T o change name of an Input, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup . 2 ) Select Label Input from the Option menu. 3 ) Select an input or PC. The software keyboard appears. 4 ) Enter the new name. 5 ) Select OK to save the name and exit the me nu. T o cancel, press HOME MENU . KID S 1234567890 ABCDE F GH I J K LM NOPQRS T U VWX Y Z , . : ; &' ( ) - * /_ @ OK Cancel Caps Space Delete Label PRO151FD.book Page 43 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
44 En 03 Basic Operations For Television Viewing 3.3 Quick Start for Watching Television Y our flat panel TV has many functions and features, some of which you may simpl y lack the time to set when first installing the panel. T o begin watching TV quickly , refer to the basic information within this section. However , when it is convenient, we strongly suggest go ing through the rest of this manual an d learning all that your flat panel TV can do . 3.3.1 Change the Channel/Sub-Channel Another option for changing the chan nel is to use the nu mber buttons ( 0 through 9 ). Simply press the number buttons in the order needed for that chan nel. F or example, enter Channel 231 as 2 - 3 - 1 or Channel 4 as the single number , 4 . A recent addition to TV viewing is the Sub-channel. A di gital channel can be split in to mu ltiple signals. Each signal, called a sub-channel, can carry a different program. T o watch a sub-channel, us e a combination of number buttons and the dot ( . ) butto n. F o r example, if Channe l 5 is digi tal and has three activ e sub-cha nnels, ente r 5 . 2 to reach th e second sub-channel . Note: T o tune in a program more quickly , enter the channel or sub-channel then press CH ENTER . 3.3.2 Adjust the Volume/Sound With the remote control pointed at the panel’s remote sensor , press and hold VOL to increase the sound volume gradually . Holding down VOL– decreases the volume at the sa me rate. A single press of VOL or VOL– causes the volume to adjust by minor increments. T o silence all sound, press MUTING . The muting symbol ( e ) appears on screen . T o return the volume to the previous level, press MUTING again. P ressing VOL once also increases the volu me o ne step higher th an the current leve l and cancels the muting mode. If the panel’s default sound level is too loud or too so f t, refer to “3.4 .6 General Sound (Audio) Adjustment.” 3.3.3 Turn On the Sleep Timer T o save energy and to maximize the life of y our flat panel TV , tr y using the Sleep T imer for occasions when the panel may be lef t on by ac cident. The Sleep Timer places the panel in Standby when th e selected time elapses. The Sleep Ti mer provides time periods of 30, 60, 90, or 120 minutes. When the Timer is down to five minutes, a reminder appears on sc reen each minute until the time h as elapsed. T o set the Sleep Timer , follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Sleep T imer through th e Setup. 2 ) Select the desired time period. Select between 30 minutes and 2 hou rs (120 minutes). 3 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. With the remote control poin ted at the panel’s remote sensor , press the CH button to sequentially change to the next highest available channel . The CH – butt on sequentially changes down to the next lowest available channel. Each p ress of CH or CH – causes the channel to change sequentially from station t o station. T o return to the previous channel, press CH RETURN . T o toggle between the two channels, press CH RETURN again. Eac h press of this button switches the channe l between these two stations. PRO151FD.book Page 44 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
45 En Basic Operations For Television Viewing 03 The SLEEP indica tor on the front of th e flat panel TV lights orange when the Sl eep Timer is set. T o check the remaining time, press TOOLS then select Sleep. “R emain ---min” appear s at the top of the menu screen. After checking the time, press EXIT to return to your program with out losing the Sleep Timer setting. Note: When the sleep timer has been set, “Remain ---min ” appears at the to p of the menu. Ho wever , the Video P attern timer has priority over the sleep ti mer . When the Video P attern timer is on , the sleep timer is deactiva ted. Video P attern is explained fully la ter in this manual. 3.4 Adjust the Picture and Sound Quality Y our flat panel T V has many adjustment option s for the pi cture and the sound to make it just righ t for you. This section provides ba sic adjustments but f or detailed video/audio mo difications, refer to “4 A dditional P icture and Sound Adjustment Options” and “4.7 Select Alte rnatives for/to Sound.” 3.4.1 Adjust the Picture for Your Room Lighting The flat panel TV senses the amount of light in your room and automati cally adjusts the screen brightness for the best picture. Bright rooms require st ronger coloring so images appear crisp while dimly li t rooms allow the picture to use more subtle coloring. Set the Color Sensor fu nction to On for best colori ng possible for the selected image and view ing enviro nment (refer to “2.5 Attach th e Color Sens or ” on page 26 for deta ils on how to attac h the sensor). The panel ships with the Room Light Se nsor turned Off . The sections b elow provide directions to turn the room lighting sensor and color sens or On/Off . Room Lighting Sensor T o deactivate/reactivate the room lig hting sensor , follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select Room Light Sensor from the Option men u. 3 ) Select Mode 1 or Mode 2 (or Off ) from the submen u. Note: If the color sensor is not in use, adjustments are made for Mode 1 and Mode 2 based o n the informat ion collected at the R oom Light Sensor . 4 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Option Description Off No effect Mode 1 automatically adjusts the picture brightness for the best possible image quality based on the informatio n collecte d at the Room Light Sen sor and Color Sensor Mode 2 automatically adjust s the picture brightness and coloring for best image quality possible for the viewing e nvironme nt based on th e informa tion collected at th e Room Light Sensor an d Color Sensor Game Control Pref : Off Room Light Sensor : Off Screen Protection Label Input PRO151FD.book Page 45 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
46 En 03 Basic Operations For Television Viewing Blue LED Dimmer Adjust the brightness of the POWER ON indicator depending on the brightness level of the viewing area. Setti ng to Auto to ggles the brightnes s of th e indicator between High, Mid and Low to match th e brightness level of the viewing area. T o set the indicator , follow the directions below . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select Blue LED Dimmer from the Option menu. 3 ) Select Auto , High, Mid or Low from the submen u. 4 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. 3.4.2 General P icture (Video) Adjustme nt for an AV Source The directions below apply to all A V so urces except OPTIMUM. If the viewi ng option is OPTIMUM, your flat panel TV automatically adjusts the picture to the best possible level. 1 ) Access the Pi c t u r e through the Setup. 2 ) Select an item to be adjusted. Contra st is use d in the ex ample be low . 3 ) Use the arrow buttons ( / ) to adjust to the desi red level. 4 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Reduce Noise from Analog TV Sometimes electronic signal static can cause imperfections in the picture. This static is called V ideo Noise. Y our flat panel TV can reduce vi deo noise from an analog TV channel, depen ding on th e broadcast signal level. Sometim es the bro adcast sign al has hig her inter ference leve ls so that som e video no ise is notic eable. This function is only selectable for signals from an antenn a. F o llow the steps below to reduce noise on an analog TV channel. 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup. 2 ) Select Analog TV Setup from the System Setup menu. 3 ) Select Manual A djust from the subme nu. Only anal og channels set using Auto Installation are ma nually adjustable. 4 ) Select P rogram Entry . 5 ) Select a channel number to be added. Use the arrow buttons ( / ) to enter a channel number . 6 ) Select T uner NR . 7 ) Select On . The defaul t setting is On . 8 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. A V Selection : PERFORMANCE Contrast : 40 Brightness : 0 Color : 0 Tint : 0 Sharpness : 0 Pro Adjust Reset Picture Contrast 32 PRO151FD.book Page 46 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
47 En Basic Operations For Television Viewing 03 Picture Image Position Each input source stores the picture adjustment settings for that view . Al though repositioning is available in most screen views, when the screen is se t to Dot-by-Dot, the Position menu is unavailable. Also, depending on the displayed video , the image position may not ch ange after an adjustment. T o adjust the picture’s ho rizontal and vertical position, fo llow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select Po s i t i o n from the Option menu. 3 ) Select H/V P osition Adjust from the submenu. 4 ) Adjust the vertical and/or horizont al positioning usin g the arrow button s. 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Restore Default Picture After making multiple adjustments, it may be difficult to reverse improper settings. T o restore the factor y default video settings, follow the directions below . 1 ) Highlight Res e t from the P icture menu. 2 ) P ress ENTER to continue with the picture reset. A confirmation screen appears asking if settings should be retu rned to the factor y defaults. 3 ) U se the arrow bu ttons t o highlight Ye s . 4 ) P ress ENTER . All video settings return to the original default valu es when selecting options other than OPTIMUM or PC. When OPTIMUM is selected, video settings for OPTIMUM. A V Selec tion menus, and Sound Control settings return to the original default value s. 3.4.3 Compare Images When Adjusting the Picture When adjusting the picture, look for an overall improvement by adjusting each parameter or option one at a time. Many small adjustments lead to the best pi ct u re fo r y ou r v ie w i n g a r ea . A s e ac h o pt io n c ha n ge s, re fe r b ac k t o t he previously set image for comparison . This section includes adjustment notes and steps to adjust the flat panel TV’s p icture. Each parame ter/option must be a d justed separately . Fo r example, if two option s under AV Selection, PERFORMANCE and MOVIE need adjustment, change/compare one opti on then save the preferred setting before moving on to the other option. Below are ot her guidelines to follow wh en adjusting the picture. • Adjustments are available while on the After s c r e e n . T r y i n g t o m a k e a d j u s t m e n t s w h i l e o n t h e Before causes a warning message to appear. • Switc h to another parameter/option on ly from the After screen. If viewing the Before screen when selecting another option, the Before data is lost. • E xiting an op tion from the Before screen stores that previous entry in memory and deactivates the button . • Exiting an option from the After screen stores the new entry in memory and deactivates the TOOLS button. • Moving/changing the AV Selection pa rameter/option stores the option se tti ng in memory (button continues to work). P osition Auto Size : Off Side Mask HDMI Input HDMI Control Setting Blue LED Dimmer : Auto Orbiter : Off Video Pattern PRO151FD.book Page 47 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
48 En 03 Basic Operations For Television Viewing F ollo w the steps belo w to adjust op tions for the pref erred picture qu ality . 1 ) Access the Pi c t u r e through the Setup. 2 ) Select an option. 3 ) Use the TOOLS button to toggle betwee n the pr evious and adjusted images. 4 ) Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to continue adjusting the option as needed. 5 ) Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to adjust other picture options. 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Note: if no selections are made within 6 0 seconds, th e menu closes automatically and the current settings are saved to memor y . T o exit the menu without saving the changes, switch to the Before screen then press HOME MEN U . 3.4.4 Display a Graphical Picture/Sound Adjustment Screen Selecting OPTIMUM from the A V Selection menu causes the P i cture menu to display different A V source submenus. Select On for the Sound Control option to automatically adjust the sound quality , and OPTIMUM P er formance provides an on-screen graphic moni tor for multiple pictur e and sound adjustments. OPTIMUM Performa nce OPTIMUM P er formance display s on-going picture and sound ad justments using graphical d ata when selecting OPTIMUM from the A V Selection menu. OPTIMUM P er f ormance provides the following bar graph data: • Analyzer: Histogram, RGB, Room Light, Color Sensor • Picture: Contrast, Brightness, Co lor, Sharpness, Color Temp, Gamma •S o u n d : L e v e l T o display OPTIMUM P er formance, follow the procedure below . 1 ) Access the Pi c t u r e through the Setup. 2 ) Select AV S e l e c t i o n from the P icture menu. 3 ) Select OPTIMUM from the A V Selection menu. 4 ) Select OPTIMUM P er formance from the Picture menu. The OPTIMUM P er formance appears. T o canc el the OPTIMUM P er formance opti on, press EXIT . Note: When OPTIMUM is se lected, press and hold DISPLAY on the remote cont rol to show OPTIMUM Pe r f or m a n c e . OPTIMUM P er formance compares the pic ture and sound qua lity between “Off ” ( unadjusted) and “On ” (adjusted using the TOOLS button). OPTIMUM Perf ormance [OPTIMUM] On OPTIMUM On/Off [Analyzer] Histogram RGB Room Light Color Sensor : Disab le [Picture] Contrast Brightness Color Sharpness Color T emp Gamma [Sound] 60 1k 12k(Hz) PRO151FD.book Page 48 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
49 En Basic Operations For Television Viewing 03 3.4.5 Sound Control Setting the Sound Control option to On automati cally adjusts to the high est sound quality possible for the selected image and viewing environment. This option is also available when OPTIMUM is selected in the A V Selectio n menu. T o activa te Soun d Contro l, follow the pro cedure be low . 1 ) Access the Pi c t u r e through the Setup. 2 ) Select A V Selection from the Picture menu. 3 ) Select OPTIMUM from the A V Selection menu. 4 ) Select Sound Contro l from the P icture menu. 5 ) Select On. 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Note: When Sound Control from the Pic ture menu is select ed, the only Sound menu opti on available is A V C (Auto V olume Control). 3.4.6 General Sound (Audio) Adjustment Many prefer a heavier base when watching mov ies or music v i d e o s f r o m a n A V s o u r c e o r o n T V . O t h e r s l i k e a m o r e balanced sound. T o adjust the sound to yo ur preference, follow the directions below . 1 ) Access the Sound through the Setup. 2 ) Select an option for adjustment. 3 ) Use the left/rig ht arrow buttons ( / ) to adjust the option. 4 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Restore Default Sound Setting T o restore the factory de fault sound settin gs, foll ow the directions below . 1 ) Highlight Res e t from the S ound menu. 2 ) P ress ENTER to continue with the sound reset. A confirmation screen appears as king if settings should be returned to the factor y defaults. 3 ) U se the arrow bu ttons t o highlight Ye s . 4 ) P ress ENTER to restore all sound settings to the original default values. Note: The Auto V olume Control (AVC) setting cannot be restored to the factor y default. Option Left Button Right Button T reble weakens tone strengthens tone Base weakens tone strengthens tone Balance shifts audio balance to the le ft shifts audio balance to the right T reble : 0 Bass : 0 Balance : 0 Sound Effect Reset A VC : Off PRO151FD.book Page 49 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
50 En 03 Basic Operations For Television Viewing 3.5 Block Programs, Channels, or Content Although blocking programs, channels, or content is opti onal, some images may be in appropriate for all family members. Y our flat panel TV supports a blocking function known as P arental Control. W ith P arental Control activated, certain mat erial fails to appear on screen if it is beyond your sele ct viewing level. P arental Control uses recognized rati ng systems but also allows blocks placed at your discretion. This section explains the diff erent blocking functions and how to assign each type. Note: When watching a TV program, yo u may see an emergency alert message scrolling at the to p of the screen . The te levision s tation is broa dcastin g the em ergency mess age as a test or an alert in a real emergency . The flat panel TV ships with this fu nction active. F or info rmation about emergency messages, refer to “3.5.3 Assign a Rating System to Create Blocks” . 3.5.1 Assign a Parental Control (Block) Password With P arental Control, inappropriat e TV programs, VCR recordings, and DVD content can be blocked. When someone attempts to watch a blocked program or conten t, the flat panel TV displays the password window . P arental Control applies to both analog and digital materia l. T o ensure that your blocks are not re moved in error , the flat panel TV requ ires a password to change access to blocked programs, chan nels, or content. Th e default password for your panel is 1234 . W e strongly recommend changing the pa ssword to a four-digit code that is meaningful to you. F ollow the steps below to change the password. 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup . 2 ) Select Change P assword from the System Setup menu. 3 ) Enter the current four-digit code using the 0 through 9 buttons. A confirmation message appears on screen . 4 ) Enter your new password. 5 ) Enter your new password a second time when prompted. 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. W rite your new password: If you forget your password: When “Please Inpu t Your Password” appears at Step 4, press and hol d the ENTER button for three or more seconds. The password reverts to the default passw ord, 1234. Please Input Y our Passw or d. PRO151FD.book Page 50 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
51 En Basic Operations For Television Viewing 03 3.5.2 Activate Parental Contr ol The P arental Control function must be activ e for the panel to block content. If this op tion is turned Off , blocked programs appear o n screen. T o activate P arental Control b locking, fo llow the steps below . 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup. 2 ) Select P arental Control. The password entr y screen appears. 3 ) Enter your four-digit code using the 0 through 9 buttons. 4 ) Select Status. 5 ) Select On to activate P aren tal Control. 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. When a program is blocked, a ( B ) appears in appropriate rating bo xes. If a channel is blocked but the P arental Control system is turned of f , the symbol is a ( V ) and the channel/program is viewable. 3.5.3 Assign a Rating System to Create Blocks Besides choosing to block c ertain channels, you may use on e of the recognized rating systems to block programs and/or co ntent. Y our pan el recogn izes the following rating sy stems: •T V r a t i n g s • TV Parental Guidelines in cluding unrated programming • Motion Picture Association of America (MPAA for movies) • Canadian English/French rating systems Note: Y our flat panel TV ship s with all ratings unblocked. T o block TV or other content using a rating system, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup. 2 ) Select P arental Control from the System Setup menu. 3 ) Select one of the rating systems from the submenu. Status : Off MP AA Ratings TV Parental Guidelines Canadian English Ratings Canadian French Ratings Unav ailable Ratings : View Digital Regional Ratings B B B V B FV D The lock symbol here marks blocked TV ratin gs. PRO151FD.book Page 51 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
52 En 03 Basic Operations For Television Viewing 4 ) Use the arrow buttons to high light a block level for that rating system. 5 ) P ress ENTER to reverse the blocked stat us for the highlighte d TV P arental Guideline option . A block ( B ) or view ( V ) symbol appears in appropriate rating boxes. F or other rati ng options, press / to toggle between b lock and view . 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. When a rating is blocked, all more severe ratings are blocked as well. For e xample, blocking TV rating TV -PG (P arental guidance suggeste d) a utomaticall y blocks TV -14 (P arents strongly cautio ned) and TV -MA (Mature audiences only). In turn, unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to become automatically avail able. Program Rating of “None” The flat panel TV also provides a r ating sett ing tha t blocks program s with a rating of None . The US TV P arental Guidelines Rati ng system id entifies programs with a None rating level. Example s of programs wit h a rating of None are as follows: • Emergency Bulletins (such as EAS me ssages, weather wa rning an d others) • L ocally orig inated program ming • Public Service Announcements •N e w s • P olitic s • Religion •S p o r t s MP AA R atings menu TV P arental Gui delines menu Canadian Englis h Ratings menu Canadian F rench R atings menu Unavailable Ra tings menu Digital R egional Ratings menu N/A : View G : View PG : View PG-13 : View R : View NC-17 : View NR : View TV -None TV -Y TV -Y7 TV -G TV -PG TV -14 TV -MA B B B V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V B FV D L S V E : View C : View C8 : View G : Block PG : Block 14 : Block 18 : Block E : View G : View 8 ans : View 13 ans : View 16 ans : View 18 ans : View Status : Off MP AA Ratings TV Parental Guidelines Canadian English Ratings Canadian French Ratings Unav ailable Ratings : View Digital Regional Ratings Status : Off MP AA Ratings TV Parental Guidelines Canadian English Ratings Canadian French Ratings Unav ailable Ratings : View Digital Regional Ratings PRO151FD.book Page 52 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
53 En Basic Operations For Television Viewing 03 T o block a program with a rating of None , follow th e steps be low . 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup . 2 ) Select P arental Control from the System Setup menu. 3 ) Select TV P arental Guidelines from the P arental Control m enu. 4 ) Select TV -None from the submenu. 5 ) Select an option ( Vie w or Block ). 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Refer to “8.1 Ratings Charts (for V a rious Audience Classification s)” for de tailed information abou t the different rating systems. Block Not Rated Programs With some TV programs , the ratin g information is unava ilable. T o block these prog rams, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup . 2 ) Select P arental Control from the System Setup menu. 3 ) Select Unavailable Ratings from the P arental Control menu. 4 ) Select an option ( Vie w or Block ). 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Note: Y our flat panel TV ships with this option set to View . New Ratings System for Digital Broadcasts Some Digital broadcasts c arr y new ratings that are not compatible with the panel’s original P arental Control settings. When first tuning to one of these broadcasts , the Digital Regional R atings menu appears on screen. Change the P arenta l Control settings to handle the new ra tings. Otherwise, previous blocked ratin gs may become unblocked. Note: Adding the new ra ting does not cause programs wi th this rating system to be block ed automatically . T o add the new ratin g system to your panel, follo w the directio ns below . 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup. 2 ) Select P arental Control from the System Setup menu. 3 ) Select Digital R egional Ratin gs from the submenu. A list of available ratings appears. 4 ) Select from the available ratings. 5 ) Select a level from the available ratings . 6 ) Select View or Block . 7 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. PRO151FD.book Page 53 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
54 En 03 Basic Operations For Television Viewing Delete a New R atings System I f a n a d d e d r a t i n g s s y s t e m i s n o l o n g e r needed, dele te the ratings system from your fla t panel TV . It is unneces sar y to remove blocks from individual cha nnels or programs. Deleting the ratings line removes any/all blocks initiated with that system. 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup. 2 ) Select P arental Control from the System Setup menu. 3 ) Select Digital R egional R atings from the submenu. 4 ) Select RRT R eset to delete the new rati ngs sy stem from the flat panel TV . The message “R eset digital regional ratings?” appears. 5 ) Select OK. 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. While the P arental Control menu is open , the status di splay remains unchanged even if the system receives broadcasts c arr ying new ratings. 3.5.4 Temporarily Remove a Block The password entr y screen appears when detecting the bloc ked rating signals (with the pic ture and sound turned off). Entering your four -digit password allows you to view the program until your flat panel TV is placed into Standby or turned Off . T o temporarily remove a block, follow the steps below . 1 ) T une the flat panel TV to the blocked channel. 2 ) W ait for the Block message to appear on screen. 3 ) Enter the four-digit password. The password window appears. When a four-digit password is entered, or no operation is pe r formed within 60 seconds, the window disappears. T o recall the wind ow after it disappears, chan ge the channel or input source then return before repeating the above ste ps. F or INPUT 2 (except 480i signals) and IN PUT 4 throug h INPUT 7, the password entr y screen appears when Block is selected from the Unavailable Ratings menu. Please Input Y our Passw or d. PRO151FD.book Page 54 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
55 En Basic Operations For Television Viewing 03 3.6 Smart Starts for New Owners Many of the flat panel TV features ma ke it easy to use but also environmen tally friendlier . This section explains how to extend the life of your panel while being energy efficie nt. We suggest applying all of the following func tions below for the simplest usage, best qual ity , and longest life span . 3.6.1 Use the TOOLS Menu T o change the current menu to anoth er option, the on-s creen TOOLS Menu provides sh ort-cuts to the available selections even while watching a program. T o display the menu, press TOOLS on the remote control. T he menus shown in this section dif fer , depending upon the men u. Use the arrow buttons to toggle between options. The setting is complete as s oon as the selected option appears in the center of the screeen . When showing two scre ens , the TOOLS Menu ap pears on t he main sc reen. 3.6.2 Extend Your Panel Life This function provides short-cuts to your panel’s longer ser vice life. Y our flat panel TV includes the Screen P rotection option. Activating this option causes the pane l to automatically select th e several different f eatures that can prolong the life of your panel and help alleviate af ter-image ghosts or burn-in. T o set this option, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select Screen P rotec tion from the Option menu. A confirmation screen appears. 3 ) Select Ye s from the submenu. The following settings are automatically entered: •Auto Size: Wide-Zoom •Side Mask - Detection: Mode 1 •Orbiter (A V source): Mode 1 •Orbiter (PC so urce): Mode 1 •Energy Save: Mode 1 4 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. TELEVISION TOOLS All Play Mode : Single Sound Random A-B Repeat Time Search Repeat EXIT TOOLS SAT GUIDE DVD TOP MENU SAT / DVD MENU HOME MENU RETURN ENTER The TOOLS Menu provides short-cuts to the selectable menu options while watching a program. PRO151FD.book Page 55 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
56 En 03 Basic Operations For Television Viewing 3.6.3 Turn On the Image Orbiter A built-in feature to protect agai nst burn-in is the Orbite r function. Orbiter automatica lly changes the position of the picture imperceptibly while the image is on screen. T o activate the Orbiter , follow the steps below . T o cancel this function, select Off in Step 3. 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select Orbiter from the Option men u. 3 ) Select Mode 1 or Mode 2. • A V source Mode 1: for any screen mode except Dot by Dot • A V source Mode 2: for all available screen modes •P C s o u r c e M o d e 1 : to enable the Orbiter • PC source Mode 2: to smooth the text/characte r appearance 4 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Note: The farthest edges of an image may be hidden at ti mes as the picture position shif ts. Also, when the Orbiter function is set to Mode 1 or Mode 2, the image may appear to drop slightly on the screen. 3.6.4 Trigger the Screen-Saving Video Pattern Periodically The V ideo P attern funct ion caus es the screen to appear white, which help s to alle viate after-image ghos ts or burn- in. While the Video P attern screen is on, only the remote’s TV ( a ) button and the panel’ s STANDBY/ON button is available. The panel automatically switches to Standby one hour after running the V ideo P attern screen. T o cancel the Video P attern sc reen, press the remote’s TV ( a ) or the panel’s STANDBY/ON . T o activate the Video P attern screen, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select Video P attern from the Option menu. A confirmation scre en appears. 3 ) Select Start from the submenu. The Vi deo P attern screen appear s. 4 ) Leave the panel alone for a minimum of one hour . Note: The Video P attern timer has priority over Sleep Time r , No Signal off , and No P ower off (P ower Management) settings. 3.6.5 Activate Energy Sa ve to Reduce Power Usage The Energy Save option decreases picture brightness and lowers power consumptio n . The recommended setting, Energy Save Mode 1, extends the life of your panel while keeping power usage at a minimum. F ollow the steps below t o activate an Energy Save option. 1 ) Access the P o wer Control through the Setup. 2 ) Select Energy Save from the menu. 3 ) Select an option from the Energy Save submenu. 4 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Option Description Off No effect Mode 1 consum es less powe r than Off Mode 2 consu mes less power than M ode 1 PRO151FD.book Page 56 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
57 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options 4 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options T o take advantage of all th at your flat panel TV offers , browse th is chapter for features and functi ons that enh ance your viewing experience. Most sectio ns deal with adjusting the picture and arranging screen/menu items while the remaining sections provide sound an d power management options. Appl y as many or as few of these changes as desired. 4.1 Choose an AV Option (Video, Game , etc.) Similar to the purpose for th e room light sensor , the A V Option or Selection depends upon th e brightness of the environment and the program or movie on screen . Images ca n be from either an A V Source or from a PC. Both sources are discussed below . Choose from among the seven A V Selections for the best image from an external AV Source. Use either the remote control or the Home Men u to select the AV source. F or a PC, skip down to “4.1.3 Cho ose a PC So urce.” If th e AV so u rc e i s a G a me C on tr o l, se l ec t G A M E a nd r ef er t o “ 4 .1 .4 S et th e P a ne l to Re co g ni ze a Ga m e C on s ol e” for more information. 4.1.1 AV Source through the Remote Control F ollow the directions below to set an A V Selection for an external AV Source using the remote control. 1 ) P ress AV SELECTION on the remote control. The current A V selection appears. 2 ) P ress AV SELECTION again before the displayed mode disappears. Each press cycles the options in the order shown below . 3 ) Allow the A V Selection screen to disappear . When the screen disappears, the panel locks in last viewed option and the menu closes. AV Selection Description OPTIMUM automatically adjust s the image quality for the brightness level of the vi ewing area (shared by external input an d TV input sources) PERFORMAN CE for a highly def ined image in a normally bri ght room (shared by extern al input an d TV input sources) PURE reflects input signals as faithfully as possible for checking image ma terials, for exa mple (shared by external input an d TV input sources) MOVIE for movies (shared by external input and TV input sources) SPORT for sports programs (shared by external input and TV input sources) GAME lowers image bri ghtness for easier viewing (shared by external input and TV input sources) Standard allows customizing se ttings as desired (set the mode for each input source) PRO151FD.book Page 57 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
58 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options 4.1.2 Choose an AV Source through the Home Menu The other method for choosing an A V Selection uses the Home Menu. F o ll ow the direct ions belo w to set an AV Selection for an external A V Source. The A V Selection, OPTIMUM, automatica lly adjusts to the highes t i mage quality possible for the selected source and viewing environment. Y o ur flat panel TV employs advanced so und reproduction technologies, such as SRS WOW HD TM , OPTIMUM also automat ically adjusts to the opti mu m sound for the selected scene. This process is gradual so chan ges to the tint and brightn ess may be visible. This is normal and is not a mal function. T o choose an AV source through th e Home Menu, f ollow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Pi c t u r e through the Setup. 2 ) Select AV S e l e c t i o n from the P icture menu. 3 ) Select an option from the submenu. 4 ) P ress HOME MENU to close and exit the menu. 4.1.3 Choose a PC Source F rom a PC, choose between the two A V Selections for the best image. The options are as follows: • ST ANDARD: for a highly defined image in a normally bright room • USER: al lows customizing settings as desired for each input source (Submenu when OP TIMUM is selected for A V Selection) OPTIMUM PERFORMANCE PURE MO VIE SPORT GAME Standard A V Selection When OPTIMUM is selected, images are a djusted automatically based on the information collect ed at the Room Light Sensor, as well as the Color Sensor (when in use). A V Selection : OPTIMUM PureCinema Sound Control : Off OPTIMUM Perf ormance Reset Picture PRO151FD.book Page 58 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
59 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options 4.1.4 Set the Panel to Recognize a G ame Console When adding a game co nsole to your flat panel TV , use the Game function to establ ish a preference for image quality or for operability . T o have the panel store your Game preference, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select Game Control P ref from the menu. 3 ) Select On (operability preferred) or Off (image quality preferred). 4 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. T o activate the Game Control Pref option, set the AV Selection to GAME and use an external input (unless the source is coming from a PC). When a PC source menu is on screen, the Game Control P ref option is ignored. Also, the Game Control P ref option for operability (on) is ignored during multi-screen viewing (refer to “4.4 V iew in Multi-Screen ”) or image freezing (refer to “4.5 Freeze the P icture”) . 4.2 Adjust Specific Picture Elements Plasma technology delivers one of the best images available today . However , the vi ewing area/environment and personal preferences affect how the pict ure appears. This section provides me thods to adjust the picture and sound for your best viewing experience. 4.2.1 Choose a Sc reen Size (Automat ically or Manually) Automatic Screen Sizing The flat panel TV can auto matically select an appropri ate screen size for the incoming video signal from a connected HDMI d evice. T o allow automati c screen sizing, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select Auto Size from the Opti on menu. 3 ) Select Natural or Wid e - Zo o m from the submenu. 4 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Note: When a video signal contains no aspect ratio inform ation, the Automatic Screen Size function is unavailable. Option Description Off deactivates the Auto Size func tion Natural adjusts the imag e to the screen size Wide-Zoom enlarges and displays only the 4:3 aspect ratio portion in full and wide screen PRO151FD.book Page 59 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
60 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options Manual Screen Sizing Manually select an appropriate screen size if an image fa ils to appear in the correct format. Browse the menu for the correct screen size for a specific program. The selectable screen sizes differ depe nding on the types of input signals. While watching a TV broadcast, press SCREEN SIZE on the remote control to cycle the picture thro ugh Auto , FULL, Dot by Dot, ZOOM, CINEM A, 4:3, WIDE, WIDE 1 and WIDE 2. F reely change the screen size during broadcasts or vi deo from other input sources . Auto is available when receiving HD broadcasts. The following chart provides information abou t how th e screen appears for ea ch option. With WIDE 1 or WIDE 2 selected, a High Definition (HD) TV broadcast may crop part of an image or menu. If an image or menu appears cut or runs off the screen, change th e op tion to FULL. Avoid showing signals that fill only part of the screen. Im ages that fail to fill the screen may cause temporar y or permanent image retention depending on the frequ ency and duration . For exam ple, an HD broadcast with side masks (4:3 content) causes uneven wear of the plasma cell s. If side masks appear around a broadcast , after th at program or movie is over , switch to a full screen motion video. This action helps the panel balance wear for the plasma cells and guar d against after-image issues. F or more information about Masks, refer to “4.3.1 Adjust for Screen Masking (black bars on sides).” Note: Not all broadcast programs carr y alternative screen sizes. AV Option Description Auto adds side masks or di splays the image in full screen when detecti ng HD pictures containing side masks. See Detect Masks on page 62. FULL squeezes 16:9 images Dot by Dot matches input signal to the same n umber of screen pixels (available for 1080i or 1080p signals only) ZOOM bars may appear on the top and bottom on some programs that are 16:9 letterbox CINEMA bars may appear on the top and bottom on some programs that are 14 :9 le tterbox (available for SD signals only) 4:3 side bars appe ar on each side WIDE pictures progressively stretch toward each side (available for SD signals only) WIDE 1 pictures progressively stretch toward each side (available for HD signals only) WIDE 2 pictures evenly stretch toward each side (available for HD signals only) PC Option Description 4:3 fills without altering the input signal aspect ratio FULL shows 16:9 screen display PRO151FD.book Page 60 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
61 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options 4.2.2 Correct the Picture f or an AV or PC Source Although pi cture adjustments are to your persona l preferences, often the source causes unan ticipated image changes. Y our flat panel TV offers several adjustment options. AV Source PC Source T o correct the picture for an A V or a PC source, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Pi c t u r e through the Setup. 2 ) Select an option to adjust. 3 ) Select the desired level for that op tion using the l ef t/right arrows ( / ). 4 ) Repeat the process for an y additional adjustments. 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu after a ll adjustments are complete. Note: Reset returns all settings to the factor y defaults. Option Left Ar row Right Arro w Contrast less contrast more contrast Brightness dimmer brighter Color decreased intensity increased intensity Tint purplish skin tones greenish skin tones Sharpness softer definition crisper defini tion Option Left Ar row Right Arro w Contrast less contrast more contrast Brightness dimmer brighter Red weaker color stronger color Green weaker color stronger color Blue weaker color stronger color A V Source PC Source A V Selection : PERFORMANCE Contrast : 40 Brightness : 0 Color : 0 Tint : 0 Sharpness : 0 Pro Adjust Reset Picture A V Selection : ST AND ARD Contrast : 40 Brightness : 0 Red : 0 Green : 0 Blue : 0 Reset Picture Contrast 32 PRO151FD.book Page 61 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
62 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options 4.3 Assign Advanced Picture Functions You r f l a t p a n e l T V pr o v i d e s v a r i o u s a d v a n c e d f u n c t i on s f o r optimizing the picture qualit y that go beyond the basic adjustm ents explain ed earlier in th is manual. This section explores th e value offe red through Pioneer ’s P ro A djust High Definition (HD) support, top quality blacks, better balanced whites, and overa ll color improvements. 4.3.1 Adjust for Screen Mask ing (black bars on sides) Screen Masks fill areas on both sides of a picture. Some content fails to fill the screen so bars appear on each side of the picture. This section ex plains how to adjust screen masking. Detect Masks Some HD broadcasts transmit in 4:3 content with side masks. Side masks are black bars th at appear on the picture’s left and right sides. If the flat panel TV ’s Screen Size is se t to Natural during the Auto Size process, gra y bars replace th e black bars. W hen the pane l is set to Wide-Zoom, the ba rs are hidden. These res ponses reduc e after-image concerns. T o allow the panel to detect side masks, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select Side Mask from the Option menu . 3 ) Select Detectio n from the submenu. 4 ) Select Mode 1 or Mode 2 to activate Side Mask Det ection. Mode 1 detects only bl ack side masks and Mode 2 detect s both black and illustrated side masks. Select Off to deactivate this function. 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. 6 ) Confirm that the word “ AUT O” appears in the InfoBanner . Vide o signals can affect the Side Mas k Detection function diff erently . F or High Definition broa dcasts, if Side Mask Detection is on , the panel automati cally detects images contai ning side masks and shows the picture in full screen. Cycle the screen size to select Auto fo r video sign als without as pect ratio information. Vide o content also ca n affect the Side Mask Detection funct ion. If a detection error oc curs when tr ying to watc h HD content, manually change the screen size to the prop er setting for the content. HD Wide Mode The HD Wide Mode allows sele cting th e display mode (WIDE 1 or WIDE 2) when detect ing side masks that appear in a 4:3 image. This option is availa ble w hen the Auto Si ze menu is set to Wide-Zoom and Side Mask Detection to Mode 1 or Mode 2. T o allow the HD Wide Mode, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select Side Mask from the Option menu . 3 ) Select HD Wi de Mode from the s ubmenu. 4 ) Select Mode 1 or Mode 2 to activate H D Wide Mode. • Mode 1: screen mode sets to WIDE 1 when detecting side masks . • Mode 2: screen mode sets to WIDE 2 when detecting side masks . 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. PRO151FD.book Page 62 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
63 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options Lighten Side Masks If content appears with bars (side mask s) on each side of a picture when th e screen size is 4:3 and Side Mask Detection is set to Mode 1 or Mode 2, the bars automatically chan ge from black to gray . However , the gray is fairly dark. T o change the bars to a l ighter shade of gray , follow the steps b elow . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select Side Mask from the Option menu. 3 ) Select Brightness Sync . from the submenu. 4 ) Select the desired parameter . 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. 4.3.2 Select a PureCinema Level for H igh Quality Image P ioneer ’s PureCinema automatically dete cts and an alyses a film-based source (originally encoded at 24 frames/ second) then recreates each still film frame for HD picture quality . The fu nction supports bo th film and text material. T o set the P ureCinema level for your HD material, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Pi c t u r e through the Setup. With A V Selection set to OPT IMUM, go to Step 2. With A V Selection set to any options other than OPTIMUM, select P ro Adjust then go to Step 2. 2 ) Select Pu r e C i n e m a from the subme nu. 3 ) Select Fil m M o d e or Te x t O p t i m i z a t i o n depending on the material. 4 ) Select the desired parameter . Parameter Description Fixed sets the sa me brightness for gray side ma sks Auto adjusts the side mask br ightness accord ing to the brightness of screen images Mode Parameter Description Film Mode Off deactiva tes PureCinema Standard (not available for input signals 480p, 720p @60 Hz, or 1080p @60 Hz) automatica lly detects recorded image data when displaying DVD or high -definitio n images (e.g., mov ies) having 24 frames per second for smooth and vivid playback Smooth (not available f or input signals 1080p @60 Hz) produces smoother and more vivid moving images Advance (not a va ilable for input signals 1080p @60 Hz) convert s theatr e-quality images to 72 Hz when disp laying DVD images (e.g., movies) having 24 frames per second for smooth and vivid playback T ext Off deacti vates text optimization Optimization On improves subtitle display quality PRO151FD.book Page 63 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
64 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Note: Activating the Game Control P ref setting under the Option menu disables the P ureCinema setting. 4.3.3 Select an Intelligent Mode Option Use this function to optimize color tones and bright ness for images. T o select the Intelligent Mode, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Pi c t u r e through the Setup. 2 ) Select Pr o A d j u s t from the P icture menu. 3 ) Select Intelligent Mode from the submenu. 4 ) Select Mode 1 or Mode 2 (or Off). 5 ) Select the desired parameter . 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Note: As this function automatically optimizes image qua lity , this process is gradual so changes to the tint and brightness may be visible. This is normal and is not a malfunction. 4.3.4 Select the Picture Deta il Options The P icture Detail function provides fi ve adjustment op tions: DRE Picture, Black Level, ACL, Enhancer Mode and Gamma for enhanced image contrast, sharpn es s and image gradation characteristics. T o select the P icture Detail op tions, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Pi c t u r e through the Setup. 2 ) Select Pr o A d j u s t from the P icture menu. 3 ) Select P icture Detail from the subme nu. 4 ) Select DRE P icture, Black Level, ACL, Enhanc er Mode or Gamma. 5 ) Select the desired parameter . Parameter Description Off No effect Mode 1 compensates for more effective picture adjustment Mode 2 compensates fo r appropriate picture a djustment Option Parameter Description DRE P icture (emphasize s image contrast between brightness and darkness) Off No effect High enhanc es DRE picture Mid standard DRE p icture Low moderate DRE picture Black Level (emphasizes dark portion of images for enhanced contrast) Off No effect On activates Black Level ACL (compensates images for optimum contrast characteristics) Off No effect On activates ACL PRO151FD.book Page 64 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
65 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. 4.3.5 Adjust the Color Temperature Adjust the Color T emperatur e for better white balance. T o set the color temperature level, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Pi c t u r e through the Setup. 2 ) Select Pr o A d j u st from the P icture menu. 3 ) Select Color Detail from the P ro Adjust menu. 4 ) Select Color T emp from the submenu. 5 ) Select the desired parameter . T o make fine adjustments, s elect Manual, press and hold EN TER for more than three seconds. The “Manual adjustment” screen appe ars. Go to Step 6. Enhancer Mode (selects processing of the image’s high frequency (detailed) area) 1 selects Hard (SHARPNESS) image 2 selects Natural (SHARPNESS) image 3 selects Soft (SHARPNESS) image Gamma (adjusts the gamma characteristics) 1 selects gamma characteristics 1 2 selects gamma characteristics 2 3 selects gamma characteristics 3 Parameter Description High white with bluish tone Mid-High intermediate tone between High and Mid Mid natural tone Mid-Low intermediate tone between Mid and Lo w Low white with reddish tone Manual adjusts to your preference Option Parameter Description PRO151FD.book Page 65 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
66 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options 6 ) Select the desired item. T o adjust ano ther item, p ress RETURN then repeat Steps 5 and 6. 7 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. 4.3.6 Use CTI and Color Space Use the Color T ransient Improvement (CTI) and Color Sp ace opti ons to further enhance t he picture to your preference. T o set the CTI and Color Space op tions, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Pi c t u r e through the Setup. 2 ) Select Pr o A d j u s t from the P icture menu. 3 ) Select Color Detail from the P ro Adjust menu. 4 ) Select CTI or Color Space from the subme nu. 5 ) Select the desired parameter . 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. 4.3.7 Use the Color Management Use the Color Management option to fi ne adjust the coloring of images. T o set the Color Management option , follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Pi c t u r e through the Setup. 2 ) Select Pr o A d j u s t from the P icture menu. 3 ) Select Color Detail from the P ro Adjust menu. 4 ) Select Color Management from the submenu. Item Left Arrow Right Arrow R High (fine adjustment for bright portions) weaker red stronger red G High weaker green stronger green B High weaker blue stronger blue R Low (fine adjustment for dark portions) weaker red stronger red G Low weaker green stron ger green B Low weaker blue stronger blue Option Parameter D escription CTI Off No effect On activates CTI Color Space 1 optimized fo r vivi d, vibrant color repro duction 2 standard color reproduction PRO151FD.book Page 66 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
67 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options 5 ) Select the desired parameter . 6 ) Select the desired level. T o adjust another item, press RETURN then repeat Steps 5 and 6. 7 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. 4.3.8 Reduce Noise from the Image Use the video noise r eduction features for clear and crisp images. Refer to the fol lowing table for available noise reduction functions. T o select the Noise R eduction op tions, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Pi c t u r e through the Setup. 2 ) Select Pr o A d j u st from the P icture menu. 3 ) Select Noise R eduction from the P ro Adjust menu. 4 ) Select 3DNR , Field NR , Block NR or Mosqui to NR . Item Left Arrow Right Arrow R closer to magenta closer to yellow Y closer to red closer to green G closer to ye llow closer to cyan C closer to green closer to blue B closer to cyan closer to magenta M closer to blue closer to red R0 Y0 G0 C0 B0 M0 Color Management PRO151FD.book Page 67 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
68 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options 5 ) Select the desired parameter . 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. 4.3.9 Adjust Color Signals The 3DY C function optimizes characteristics for separa ting brightness signals and color signals while the I-P Mode provides optimum conversion from interlace signal s to progressive si gnals. Use these options to adjust color signals for both video and sti ll images. T o select the 3DY C and I-P Mode options, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Pi c t u r e through the Setup. 2 ) Select Pr o A d j u s t from the P icture menu. 3 ) Select Others from the P ro Adjust menu. 4 ) Select 3DY C or I-P Mode. 5 ) Select the desired parameter . 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Notes: 3D YC is available when connected to only the video terminal at INPUT 1, INPUT 2 or INPUT 3 or when analog tuner is selected. I-P Mode is unavailable when the selected mode is On for Game Control P ref or when input signal is 480p, 720p or 1080p. Option Parameter Description 3DNR (3-dimensional Noise Red u ct i o n) Off No effect High enhanc es DNR Mid standard DNR Low moderate DNR Fiel d NR (removes glimmer for more natural image) Off No effect High enhanc es Field NR Mid standard Field NR Low moderate Field NR Block NR (reduces noise in HD images ) Off No effect On activates Block NR Mosquito NR (re duces mosquito noise in DVD and HD images ) Off No effect On activa tes Mosqu ito NR Option Parameter Description 3D YC Off No effect High enhanc es 3DYC Mid standard 3DY C Low moderate 3DY C I-P Mode 1 optimizes video images 2 standard setting 3 optimize s still images PRO151FD.book Page 68 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
69 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options 4.4 View in Multi-Screen The flat panel TV can show multiple sc reens at the same time; two-screen or picture-in-picture. The pictures may be reversed (in 2-screen and P -in-P) or moved to various locati ons on the screen (P -in-P). 4.4.1 Split/Swap/Shift the Screen T o split the screen so that two ch annels appear , press the SPLIT button on the remote c ontrol. Each press of th e button cycles the screen through two-screen, picture-in-picture, and single-screen views. T o switch the images between sc reen sides/locations, press the SWAP button. T o move the P icture-In-Picture (P -in-P) small image counter- clockwise, press the SHIFT button. 2-Screen P icture-in-P icture (P -in-P) PRO151FD.book Page 69 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
70 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options The multi-screen func tion is u navailable when viewing source from a single input or from two external input sources. T o return to a single picture, press EX IT . Another option is to select a multi-sc reen mode from the TOOLS Menu. T o s elect a multi-screen mode, follow the steps below . 1 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 2 ) Select Split, Swap or Shif t from the menu. Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option (t hen press ENTER if you select Swap). 3 ) Select a mode. Select Off , 2-screen or P -in-P for the Split mode. The selected mode is displayed in the center of the TOOLS Menu. 4.5 Freeze the Picture During fast-action seq uences or deta iled pictures, try capturing the im age with the FREEZE option . FREEZE allows you to better understand the acti on o r p i ct u r e d et a i l s if d e s ir e d . T o f r e ez e a p i c tu r e f ro m a T V b r oa d c a st o r movie, follow the steps below . 1 ) P ress FREEZE to create a still image picture (copy) of the currentl y showing image. The copy appears to the ri ght of the still-moving video sequence thus splitting the screen. 2 ) P ress FREEZE again to release the image. The frozen image disappears, returning the picture to a single screen with the video sequence still in progress. • With the screen split, an image cannot be frozen . A warning message appears if you attempt to use this function when th ere is already a frozen image on screen. If an image is le ft frozen on the screen , the panel automatically releases the image after five minutes . Note: Using FREEZE for an extended period may cause an af ter-image. . Press SPLIT to cycle through the different multi- screen views. Press SWAP to switch the position of the two screens. Press SHIFT to move the position of the small screen counter-clockwise. 1 TV 2 INPUT TV/DT V DISPLA Y FREEZE SCREEN SIZE AV SELECTION 34 5 PC SPLIT SW AP SHIFT 67 Warning: Displaying pictures in multi-screen mode for an extended period ma y cause an after-image. 1 TV 2 INPUT TV/DT V DISPLA Y FREEZE SCREEN SIZE AV SELECTION 34 5 PC SPLIT SW AP SHIFT 67 PRO151FD.book Page 70 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
71 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options 4.6 Use the Banner Feature InfoBanner InfoBanner (add itional) A separate banner also appears at the bottom of the screen showing the A V Selecti on mode (bottom left) and screen size (b ottom righ t). The above information is only appears if it is included in th e broadcast signal. During multi-s creen mode, the banner appears in both main and sub screens. When tuning in a TV channel or an inpu t signal changes, any available information appears on the screen if the signal carri es information about the program (see InfoBanner below). P ressing DISPLAY causes the InfoBanner (additional) to appear . P ress EXIT or DISPLAY again to hide the banner . 1 - Broad cast signal (Digital/A nalog) 2 - Cha nnel number 3 - Station nam e 4 - P rogram tit le 5 - Sound mult iplex inform ation 6 - Current time 7 - P rogram time schedule 8 - P aren tal Contro l informatio n 9 - P a rental ico n 10 -P arental name 11 -Signal information (HD/SD) 12 -F avorit e icon D XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX STEREO 9:30AM 13 24 5 6 00001.000 ABCDEFGH D 00001.000 ABCDE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX STEREO 7:07PM-8:08PM 9:30AM HD V TV PG PRT_10 7 8 9 11 12 10 PRO151FD.book Page 71 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
72 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options 4.7 Select Alternatives for/to Sound There are four sound alternatives for yo ur flat panel TV ; CC, MTS, SAP , and Soun d Effect. This section defin es each of these alternatives then explains how/when to use. 4.7.1 Activate Closed Captioning (CC) Y our flat panel TV is equipped with an internal closed caption (CC) decoder . CC allows conve rsations, narration , and sound effects in TV programs and hom e videos to appear as subtitles on the screen . For di gital channels, some parameters can be changed such as the text font and color . However , not all programs/vid eos offer closed caption. Please look for the “ “ symbol to confirm th at the channel or program provides closed captioning. T o activate closed captioning when available, f ollow the steps below . 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup. 2 ) Select Closed Captions from the System Setup menu. 3 ) Select Status from the submenu. 4 ) Select an option. 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Types of Closed Caption Broadcast TV offers different types of close d captioning. Y our flat panel TV provides support for the recognized types on Analog progra mming as well as Digita l signals that carr y analog closed captions. • CC 1, CC 2, CC 3, or CC 4: provides subti tles with a full view of the picture • T ext 1, T ext 2, T e xt 3, or T ext 4: superimposes other information (e.g. weather) that is i ndependent of th e TV program in progres s T o change the c losed caption type from the default CC 1, follow the ste ps below . 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup. 2 ) Select Closed Captions from the System Setup menu. 3 ) Select Analog Setting s from the submen u. 4 ) Select the desired closed caption . 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Parameter Description Off does not show closed captioning (default) On shows closed captioning when available On If Mute shows closed captions only whi le sound is muted Status : Off Analog Settings : CC 1 Digital Settings PRO151FD.book Page 72 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
73 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options Closed Caption for Digital Programs There are six different closed cap tion options for digital prog ramming, ca lled Ser vice levels. The P rimar y Caption Ser vi ce is on Ser vice 1 and the Sec ondar y Language S e r vice is on Service 2. Mo re informatio n about these offerings is found later in this chapter . T o change the digital closed caption from th e default Ser vice 1, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup. 2 ) Select Closed Captions from the System Setu p menu. 3 ) Select Digital Sett ings from the submenu. 4 ) Select Digital Ser vice . 5 ) Select the desired closed caption service level ( / ). 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. T o change the appearance of closed capt ioning on a digital program, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup. 2 ) Select Closed Captions from the System Setu p menu. 3 ) Select Digital Sett ings from the submenu. 4 ) Select an option to change. 5 ) Select the desired parameter for that option . The default parameter for each option is Auto. 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Option Description F ont Si ze Auto, Larg e, Standard, Small Fo n t 1 Auto, F ont 1, Font 2 , Font 3, F ont 4, F ont 5, F ont 6, Fo n t 7 F ont Color Auto, Black, White, R ed, Green, Blue, Y ellow , Magenta, Cy an F ont Opacity Auto , Solid, T ransparen t, T ranslucent, Flas hing Background Color Auto, Black, Wh ite, R ed, Green, Blue, Y ellow , Magenta, Cy an Background Opacity Aut o, Solid, T ransparent, T ranslucent 1 F ont 1 (monospaced with serifs)/ F ont 2 (proport ionally space d with serifs)/ Font 3 ( monospaced without serifs)/ Font 4 (proportionall y spaced without serifs)/ F ont 5 (cas ual fo nt)/ Font 6 (cursive font)/ F ont 7 (small capitals font ) Digital Service : Service 1 Font Size : Auto Font : A uto Font Color : Auto Font Opacity : Auto Backgr ound Color : Auto Backgr ound Opacity : Auto Digital Settings PRO151FD.book Page 73 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
74 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options 4.7.2 Switch Languages Using MTS Multi-channel T elevision Sound (M TS) allows switch ing the audible language if it is available f or that program. Available languages differ depending on the current broadc ast. When wa tching a d igital TV pro gram that pro vides mu lti lan guage ser vices, follow the steps below . 1 ) P ress TOOLS on the remote control. The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 2 ) Select MTS from the TOOLS Menu. 3 ) Select English, F rançais or Español. A digital TV program without sound or language in formation caus es “N/ A ” to appear on the screen. F or lang ua ges other than English, F rench, or Spanish, the word “Others” appears in stead. If the selected language is available when the channel or progra m is changed, that language is heard. 4.7.3 Select SAP When watching TV programs on the VHF/UHF freq uencies or from analog cable TV channels, the TOOLS button can activate St ereo Sound and/or Secondary Audio P rograms (SAP) if availa ble. T o select Stereo/SAP option s, follow the steps below . 1 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 2 ) Select MTS from the TOOLS Menu. 3 ) Select STEREO , SAP or MONO . The chart be low breaks down the Stereo/SAP options. EXIT TOOLS SAT GUIDE DVD TOP MENU SAT / DVD MENU HOME MENU RETURN ENTER STEREO SAP MONO STEREO mode SAP mode MONO mode STEREO SAP MONO STEREO 9:30AM STEREO (SAP) 9:30AM MONO (SAP) 9:30AM MONO 9:30AM STEREO 9:30AM SAP (STEREO) 9:30AM SAP (MAIN) 9:30AM MAIN 9:30AM MONO 9:30AM MONO (SAP) 9:30AM MONO (SAP) 9:30AM MONO 9:30AM In STEREO mode In STEREO mode In STEREO mode In STEREO mode In SAP mode In SAP mode In SAP mode In SAP mode In MONO mode In MONO mode In MONO mode In MONO mode STEREO mode SAP mode MONO mode STEREO signals STEREO SAP MONO SAP MONO signals PRO151FD.book Page 74 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
75 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options When stereo sound is diffic ul t to hear , manually switch to MONO for cl earer sound. The panel’s sound remai ns in mono even if the system receives a stereo broadcast. Rese lect STERE O to hear broa dcasts in stereo where available. Selectin g MTS while the input sou rce is INP UT 1 to INPUT 7 or a PC does no t change the type of sound. In this case, the video source determines the sound. 4.7.4 Apply Sound Effect Settings Y our flat panel TV offers four sound effects: SRS FOCUS, SRS, SRS T ruBass an d SRS Definition. •S R S F O C U S TM moves sound source directio n vertically and makes sound and voice clearly audi ble •S R S ® effortlessly produces a three-dimensional sound field •S R S T r u B a s s ® produces a clear , rich bass tone •S R S D e f i n i t i o n ® improves midrange quality and cl arifies voice and instrument sound T o activate one or more of the sound effects, follow the directions below . 1 ) Access the Sound through the Setup. 2 ) Select Sound Effect from the So und menu . 3 ) Select a sound effect option. (SRS FOCUS, SRS, SRS T ruBass, SRS Definit ion) 4 ) Select Low (moderate) , Mid (standard), High (enhanced) or Off for that option. 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Note: How a Sound Effect changes the Audio depends on the signal. (SRS WOW HD TM ) indicates that SRS FOCUS, SRS, SRS T ruBass and SRS Definition are on. 4.7.5 Use Auto Volume Control (AVC) Auto V olume Control, or A VC, reduces sudden vo lume change and compensates source sound level. T o select this option , follow the procedure below . 1 ) Access the Sound through the Setup. 2 ) Select AV C from the So und menu. 3 ) Select On (or Off ). 4 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. PRO151FD.book Page 75 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
76 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options 4.8 Manage the Power Y our flat panel TV is energy efficient but includes functions to save additional power . In an earlier section enti tled “3.6 Smart St arts for New Owners” , you were t old how to activate the Energy Save feat ure. This se ction pro vides more advanced fu nctions to save po wer and to ex tend the panel life. AV/PC Source - Picture Off T o save energ y and exte nd the life of your flat pan el TV , have the screen turn Off . T o deactivate the screen , follow the steps below . 1 ) P ress TOOLS on the remote control. The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 2 ) Select Pi c t u r e O f f from the TOOLS Menu. 3 ) P ress ENTER . The screen display turns Off . T o restore the screen display , press any buttons other than VOL / – and MUTING . Note: The Picture Off setting is not memorized by the system. AV Source - No Signal T o save energy and extend the life of your flat panel TV , t he panel can enter Standb y auto matically if the A V source signal fails for 15 cons ecutive minutes. At five minutes before an d at ever y minute af ter that, a warning mess age appears on the screen . When the final minute elapses, the panel switches to Standby . T o have the panel s witch to St andby wh en an AV source signal fails, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the P o wer Control through the Setup. 2 ) Select No Signal off from the P ower Control menu. 3 ) Select Enable to activate the A V Signal off power function. 4 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Note: The flat panel TV m ay switch to Standby w hen there is noise (signal inter ference) at the end of a broadcast schedule (channel goes off-air). AV Source - Non-Oper ational T o sa ve e ner gy an d ex tend the life of y our f lat pane l TV , the panel ca n enter Standby au tomatically if there are no c o m m a n d s f r o m t h e AV s o u r c e f o r t h r e e c o n s e c u t i v e h o u r s . A t f i v e m i n u t es b e f o r e a n d a t e v e r y m i n u t e a f t e r t h a t , a warning message appears on the s creen. When the fi nal minute elapses , the pa nel switches to Standby . T o have the panel enter Standby automatically whe n there are no commands from the A V source, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the P o wer Control through the Setup. 2 ) Select No Operation off from the P ower Control menu. 3 ) Select Enable from the No Operation off menu. 4 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. PRO151FD.book Page 76 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
77 En 04 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options PC Source -Power Management When receiving signals from a PC, the panel can automatically enter Standby if the signal fail s. Fol low the steps below to activate this function. 1 ) Access the P o wer Control through the Setup . 2 ) Select P o wer Manageme nt from the P ower Control menu. 3 ) Select an option from the submenu. Note: P ressing the remote’s TV ( ) or the panel’s STANDBY/ON reactivates the flat panel TV . 4 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. These power management options are un available when a PC is connected to the panel through the HDMI port/ terminal. Option Description Off no power management (d efault) On pane l enters Standb y when no signal is received from the PC for eight minut es; using the PC has no effect on the panel PRO151FD.book Page 77 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
78 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 5 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV Although ea rlier sections have ment ioned other equipment for playing back v ideo, this section provides control and operation information for sp ecific types of equipment. 5.1 Program the Remote Control to Operate Other Equipment T o operate other equipment or devices t hrough your flat panel TV , program the panel’s remote control with the equipment’s Learning fu nction or manufacturing c ode. A ma nufacturing code is a series o f n u m b e r s t h a t i d e n t i f y the type of device and the brand. These codes are availa ble in the section entitl ed “8.2 Manufacturer Codes to P rogram into the Remote Control” in Appendix 8.2 of this manual. 5.1.1 Use the Learning Feature The Learning functio n allows the panel’s remote control to memorize other remote co ntrols’ codes. T o activate the Learning functi on follow the d irections b elow . 1 ) P ress SELECT to choose the device to learn. 2 ) P ress EDIT/LEARN and 2 at the same ti me. The selected mode i ndicator flashe s when the remote control is ready to b e learned. 3 ) Use the number buttons to learn a manufact uring code. The mode indicator lights up. The Learn session is canceled in 30 seconds and the indicator restarts blinking again . When th e indicator flashes, the selected device’s remote is memorized. T o exit the Learn mode before it finishes, press EDIT/LEARN . 4 ) P ress EDIT/LEARN again to exit the Lean mode.– Note: The Learn session is canceled: – if no operation is performed for more than one minute af ter having pressed EDIT/LEA RN and 2 (the mode indicator is flashing) – if you press SELECT – Code transmiss ion finishes in approximately two seco nds. Do not interrupt it u ntil the transmission is complete. W ait until the mode indicator flashes again . When using any of the receiver buttons (  , INPUT , or VOL /– ), the learned manufacturer code remains the same. VOL CH 1 123 456 789 0 CH ENTER CH RETURN EXIT TOOLS SAT GUIDE DVD TOP MENU SAT / DVD MENU HDMI CTRL SOURCE INPUT TV RCV VCR SAT CBL DVR DVD STOP VOL SELECT EDIT/LEARN REC HMG HOME MENU RETURN MUTING TV 2 INPUT TV/DTV DISPLAY FREEZE SCREEN SIZE AV SELECTION 34 5 PC SPLIT SWAP SHIFT 67 ENTER RECEIVER 2 cm to 5 cm (0.8 i nches to 2.0 inches) Remote control (Supplied accessory) Remote control of AV product 1 2 3 456 789 INPUT TV RCV VCR SA T CBL DVR DVD VOL SELECT RECEIVER EDIT/LEARN PRO151FD.book Page 78 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
79 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 T o delete a learned code, overwrite it with a new code on the same button or follow the directions below . 1 ) Concurrently press EDIT/LEA RN and 2 . The selected mode indicator flashes when th e remote control is ready to be learned. 2 ) Press and hold TV  for more than two seconds. The remote control st arts deleting all learned co des for selected modes. Wh en completed, the mode indicator blinks Off and the remote control returns to normal operation . 5.1.2 Assign a Manufacturing Code to the Remote Control T o assign a preset Manu facturing code to the panel’s remote c ontrol, follow the directions below . (F or Ma nufacturing codes, refer to “8.2 Manufacturer Codes to Progra m into the R emote Control.”) 1 ) P ress SELECT to choose the device to program. 2 ) P ress EDIT and 1 at the same time. The selected mode indicator flas hes when the remo te control is ready to be programmed. 3 ) Use the number buttons to enter a ma nufacturer code. When the indic ator turns off , the code has been programmed into the remote control. 5.1.3 Issue a Library Search for a Manufacturer Code If the code for a particular devic e is unknown, cycle through the available codes for a s imilar unit th en sample some functions for that code. T o find the code that properly oper ates the unit, follow the steps below using differemt codes to find the best match. 1 ) P ress SELECT to choose the device to program. 2 ) P ress EDIT and 3 at the same time. The selected mode indicator flas hes when the remote control is ready to search the code librar y . 3 ) Sample the code using a SOURCE POWER , PL A Y , 1 or CH command. 4 ) Use the up/down arrow ( / ) button s to advance t o the nex t code if the code fails to control the device. Another option is to re turn to th e previous code and repeat Step 3. 5 ) P ress ENTER to lock in the code that p roperly o perates the devi ce. All the available buttons for the selected mode are added when the mode indicator flashes on fo r one second. The remote control then returns to normal operation. 1 23 456 789 INPUT TV RCV VCR SA T CBL DVR DVD VOL SELECT RECEIVER EDIT /LEARN 12 3 FREEZE SPLIT SW AP SHIFT TOP MENU SA T / DVD MENU HDMI CTRL SOURCE INPUT TV RCV VCR SA T CBL DVR DVD STOP VOL SELECT REC HMG HOME MENU RETURN ENTER RECEIVER EDIT /LEARN PRO151FD.book Page 79 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
80 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 5.1.4 Clear Added Manu facturer Codes from the Remote Control T o return all le arned and preset codes to th e def aults (PIONEER), follow the steps below . T o exit before the reset is complete, press the EDIT button again. The reset is cancel led if no action is taken withi n 60 seconds. Also, switching the Mode during this procedure cancels the reset. 5.1.5 Control a Pioneer Receiver Th e f l at pa n el TV ’s r em o te co n tr ol h as a ba nk o f b ut t on s specifically for controlling a P ioneer receiver . The active buttons, left to right, are as follows: 1 ) P ress EDIT and TV  at the same time. Selectio n can be in an y mode . 2 ) P ress the Yellow button. Confirm that the selected mode indicator flashes. The remote control enters the Manufacturing Reset mode. The reset is complete when th e mode indicator flashes on for one second. The remote control then returns to normal operation . Note: The panel’s remote control may not control or have complet e control of some equipment listed in the tables. • RECEIVER S TANDBY/ON (turns the Pioneer Receiver On/Off) • RECEIVER INPU T (cycles through/selects an input) • RECEIVE R VOL – (adjusts the volume lower) • RECEIVE R VOL (adjusts the volume higher) 1 TV 2 INPUT TV/DT V DISPLA Y SCREEN SIZE AV SELECTION 34 5 PC 67 SA T / DVD MENU HDMI CTRL SOURCE INPUT EDIT /LEARN STOP VOL SELECT REC HMG HOME MENU RETURN RECEIVER TV RCV VCR SA T CBL DVR DVD HDMI CTRL SOURCE INPUT TV RCV VCR SA T CBL DVR DVD STOP VOL SELECT REC HMG RECEIVER EDIT/LEARN PRO151FD.book Page 80 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
81 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 5.1.6 Control a Cable (CBL ) or Satellite (SAT) System When Mode is set to CBL/SA T , a cable converter uses the buttons 1 , 6 , 7 , 8 , and 9 while satellite tuners us e the buttons 1 to 8 . However , the panel only recognizes a single system (cable or satellite) at a time. • N u m b e r b u t t o n s (press to enter a channel number) • S A T G U I D E (displays the satellite broadcasting guide screen) • E N T E R (Enter activa tes the selected func tion) (arrows to select from SAT GUIDE or MENU screens) • S A T M E N U (displays the satellite br oadcasting menu screen) • S O U R C E (turns the e quipment power on and o ff) • C H E N T E R * (enters the selected chan nel wi th the direct channel se lection buttons) • CH RETURN* (press buttons that co rrespond to a channel) • C H / – (selects a higher or lower channe l) • R E T U R N (restores the immediately previous screen) * Some cable converter manufacturers do not preset CH ENTER and CH RETURN. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 VOL CH 1 123 456 789 0 CH ENTER CH RETURN EXIT TOOLS SA T GUIDE DVD TOP MENU SA T / DVD MENU HDMI CTRL SOURCE INPUT TV RCV VCR SA T CBL DVR DVD STOP VOL SELECT REC HMG HOME MENU RETURN MUTING TV 2 INPUT TV/ DTV DISPLA Y FREEZE SCREEN SIZE AV SELECTION 34 5 PC SPLIT SW AP SHIFT 67 ENTER RECEIVER EDIT/LEARN 3 1 2 4 5 7 9 8 6 PRO151FD.book Page 81 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
82 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 5.1.7 Control a Video Cassette Recorder (VCR) When Mode is set to VCR , verif y that the proper Input is selected (INPUT 1 to INPUT 7) then use 1 to 8 to control the device. • REWind (rewinds the VCR tape and allows searches) • P A U S E / S T I L L (pauses playback and displays st ill images) • S O U R C E (turns the VCR’s pow er on and off) • C H / – (selects a higher or lower channel ) • P L A Y (selects playback) • F F (advances the VCR ta pe and allows searches) • S T O P (halts VCR tape transport) • R E C o r d (begins recording) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VOL CH 789 0 CH ENTER CH RETURN EXIT TOOLS SA T GUIDE DVD TOP MENU SA T / DVD MENU HDMI CTRL SOURCE INPUT TV RCV VCR SA T CBL DVR DVD STOP VOL SELECT REC HMG HOME MENU RETURN MUTING ENTER RECEIVER EDIT/LEARN 3 2 8 7 6 5 1 4 PRO151FD.book Page 82 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
83 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 5.1.8 Control a DVD P layer/DVR Recorder/BD Play er When Mode is set to DVD/DVR , the remote control can operate DVD players, DVD recorders or BD players connected to the flat panel TV . V erif y that the pr oper Input is selected for the device then use 1 to 14 to control it. Note: Equipm ent from other manufacturers (DVD players, DVD recorders, BD players, and HD -DVD players) can also be operated using the remote control if the remote is prese t for the device(s). • DVD TOP MENU (displays the top menu on the DVD) • E N T E R (ENTER activates the selected function) (arrows to select from SAT GUIDE or MENU screens) • DVD MENU (displays the DVD menu) • Red/Green/Blue/Yellow (BD only) (controls a BD-J applicatio n) • REVERSE SCAN/CHAPTER SE ARCH (press once quickly to go to beginning of current chapter; press aga in to go back to the beginnin g of the previous ch apter; continue pressing to go backward) • P A U S E / S T I L L (pauses playback and displays still image) • S O U R C E (turns the e quipment power on or off ) • CH /– (DVD Recorder only) (selects a higher or lower channe l) • T O O L S (assigns the co de for a Pioneer BD player) • R E T U R N (restores the immediately previous screen) • P L A Y (selects playback) • FORWARD SCAN/CHAPTER SEARCH (press once quickly to go to beginning of next chapter; press again to advance to beginning of next chapter; continue pressing for fast forward) • S T O P (halts DVD playback, some DVD players/recorders open the disc tray if this button is pressed twice) • RECord (DVD Recorder only) (begins recording) & STOP RECord (DVD Recorder only) (press and hold  then press  to stop recording - applies to P i oneer DVD recorders only) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 13 14 VOL CH 789 0 CH ENTER CH RETURN EXIT TOOLS SA T GUIDE DVD TOP MENU SA T / DVD MENU HDMI CTRL SOURCE INPUT TV RCV VCR SA T CBL DVR DVD STOP VOL SELECT REC HOME MENU RETURN MUTING ENTER RECEIVER HMG EDIT/LEARN 7 4 3 1 6 14 10 9 13 12 11 8 5 2 PRO151FD.book Page 83 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
84 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 5.2 Use HDMI Inputs High Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) is a communica tion method commonly used by digital and/ or high definition eq uipment. Y our flat panel TV’s INPU T 4, INPUT 5, INPUT 6, INPUT 7 are HDMI terminals for incoming digital video an d audio signals. Th e flat pan el TV supp orts HDMI Control f unctions s o that when a piece of equipment is connected to the panel, it can control the equipment. T o us e an HDMI terminal, specify the types of video and audio s ignals being sent from the conne cted equipment. F or the signal types, see the ope rating manual(s) th at came with the equipment. One of the benefits of using your flat panel TV to control other equipment is th e support of Deep Col or . Deep Color is the color depth th at describes the number of bits used to re present the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Besides the conventional RGB/YCbCr16bit /20bit/24bit signals, the flat panel TV also supports RGB/YCbCr30bit/36bit s i g n a l s . T h i s e n a bl e s f i n e r c o l o r r e p r o d u c t i o n w he n a d e vi c e t h a t s u p p o r t s D e e p C o lo r s i gn al s ( H D MI 1 . 3 D ee p C o l or ) is connected to the panel. The color depth appears on the InfoBanner if a prog ram supports Deep Color . The flat panel TV supports the foll owing Video signals: Note: It may take a short period for the image to appear on the other equipment, depending on the type of device. The flat panel TV supports the foll owing Audio signals: • Linear PCM (STEREO 2ch) • Samp ling frequency : 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz When connectin g a PC to one of the panel’s HDMI inputs, use an HD MI-c ompliant PC or video ca rd. Using DVI output from the PC to the flat panel TV ma y cause the sound or picture to fail or seem di storted. If a DVI output is your only option the n contact the PC manufactur er for assistan ce. 5.2.1 Specify the HDMI Input Type T o select a signal type, follow the steps below . 1 ) Select the Input for the connected equipment. P ress the INPUT button (remote control or panel) until the correct input is sh owing (INPUT 4, INPUT 5, INPUT 6, or INPUT 7). Note: For INPUT 4 and INPUT 5, add Audio cables to support an alog signals. 2 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 3 ) Select HDMI Input from the Option menu. 4 ) Select Signal T ype from the s ubmenu. 5 ) Select the appropriate option. 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Supported Video Signals Supported PC S ignals • 1920 x 1080p@60 Hz • 1920 x 1080p@24 Hz • 1920 x 1080i@59.9 4 Hz/60 Hz • 1280 x 720p@59.94 Hz/60 Hz • 720 x 480p@59.9 4 Hz/60 Hz • 720 (1440) x 480 i@59.94 Hz/60 Hz • 1280 x 1024 (SXGA) 60 Hz • 1360 x 768 (Wide - XGA) 60 Hz • 1024 x 768 (XGA) 60 Hz • 800 x 600 (SVGA) 60 Hz • 640 x 480 (VGA) 60 Hz Option Description Video use except when a PC is c onnected (default) PC when a PC is connecte d to HDMI input terminal PRO151FD.book Page 84 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
85 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 In Video mode, the image is over-scann ed (enlarged) but the panel automatically switches to PC when receivin g computer signals. In PC mode, the image disp lays in full s ize fo r optimum image q uality . 5.2.2 Specify a Digital HDMI Signal Type F or the necessary digital video signal type, check the op erating manual that c ame wi th the other equipment. T o assign the type of digital signal, follow the ste ps below . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select HDMI Input from the Option menu. 3 ) Select Vid e o from the submenu. 4 ) Select the type of digital video signal recommended for the attached device. 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. If an image f ails to appear , specify another digital video si gnal type. T ype parameters ot her tha n Auto need to be checked for natural colorings. 5.2.3 Specify an Audio HDMI Signal Type F or the necessar y audio signal type, check the operating manual tha t came with the other equipment. When using INPUT 4 or INPUT 5 f or HDMI, select th e terminal for the desired input source. T o specif y the au dio type, follow the s teps belo w . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select HDMI Input from the Option menu. 3 ) Select Audio from the s ubmenu. 4 ) Select the type of audio signal recommended for the attached device. 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Type Description Auto automatically identifi es input digital signals (default) Color-1 Di gital Component Video signals (4:2:2) locked Color-2 Di gital Component Video signals (4:4:4) locked Color-3 Di gital RGB signals (16 to 235) locked Color-4 Digital RGB sign als (0 to 255) locked Type Description Auto automatically identifies input audio signals (default) Digital accepts digital audio signals Analog accepts analog audio signals Vid e o ( o ve r- s c a n) PC (under -scan) PRO151FD.book Page 85 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
86 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV If there is no sound, specif y another audio signal type. Depending on the type of equ ipment, sound output may require analog audio cables i n ad dition to the HDMI con nection(s). Note: When signals come through the HDMI terminals, no si gnals are output from the DIGIT AL OUT terminal if they are copy guarded. 5.3 Control Equipment with the Pa nel’s Remote Through HDMI Y our flat panel TV ’s remote can control other equipment su ch as a recorder , player , or A V system through the HDMI Control functions. The HDMI C ontrol functions include play back of content using an on-screen co ntrol panel. However , not all device operations ma y be available through HDMI contr ol. F or details, see the charts below . Notes: The KURO LINK function name used on the web an d in catalogs is referred to as HDMI Control in the operatin g instructio ns and on the product. Except for P ower Off and Display Language Setup functi ons, only a single HDMI terminal may be active at a time. The flat panel TV ’s remote can control a maximum of two (2 ) recorders, two (2) playback devices, and one (1) A V system at a time. T o select and use the various HDMI Cont rol functions for a conn ected P ioneer A V system, recorder , or player , use the panel’s HDMI Control menu. Control Function Controlled Equipment Function Description Playback of content Reco rd er Player P ressing PL AY on a connected device automatically selects the source and begins play back On-screen control R ecorde r Player Recorder/player operation can be controlled on-screen or with the panel’s remote (play , stop, fast forw ard/reverse, etc.) Display Language Setup Reco rd er Player Information on the display menu language transfers to the recorder or player connected to the flat panel TV . F or details, see the operation ma nual that came with the recorder or player . A V system control A V system R eceiv er/amplifier operat ion can also be controlled with the panel’s remote, (volume, surroun d mode and inpu t selection o f the HDMI terminal ) P o wer ON Recorder Player The flat panel TV can be turned On when a connected recorder(s) or player(s) is turned On and images are input to the flat pa nel TV Po w e r O F F Re c o r d e r Player A V system The connected device(s) can be turned Off when the flat panel TV is turned Off PRO151FD.book Page 86 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
87 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 T o access the menu, follow the steps below . 1 ) P ress HOME MENU . 2 ) Select HDMI Control from the main menu. Use the arrow buttons to high light an option then press ENTER . Note: P ressing HDMI CTRL on the remote also causes the HDMI Control menu to open. Use the following buttons to control functions such as the disc navigator on a recorder or player . • VOL /– (adjusts the volum e for an AV system) • M U T I N G (turns off the sou nd while the video continues to play) • Arrow buttons (navigates the menu screen) • Color buttons (Red, Green , Blue, Y ellow) (controls a BD player) • TOOLS (assigns the code for a P ioneer BD player) • E N T E R (activates the selected fun ction) • R E T U R N (returns to the prev ious menu screen) T o connect a device for HDMI Co ntrol, foll ow the steps be low . 1 ) T urn on the flat panel TV and all other equipment. 2 ) C onfirm that the panel’s Inpu t Setting for HDMI Co ntrol Setting options comply with directions in the operating instructions for the connected device(s). Option Description Disc Navigator displays a title list of connected recorder or player CTRL Panel (AV-SYS) displays the control panel for connected A V system Playback CTRL Panel displays the control pane l for connected recorder or player Switch to AV Sou nd/ Switch to T V Sound switches between the flat panel TV screen and the connected A V system for sound output Disc Navigator CTRL Panel(A V -SYS) Playbac k CTRL Panel Switch to A V Sound 4 3 1 2 6 5 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PRO151FD.book Page 87 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
88 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 3 ) Confirm that the other equipment is set for HDMI Control. 4 ) Check that the aud io and video are playing back properly from the equipment connected to the HDMI terminal(s). 5 ) T urn Off the flat panel TV . 6 ) P ause for a few seconds befo re turning the power back on. 7 ) V erify that all equipment is functioning properly . T o select the device t o control via HDMI Control, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select HDMI Control Setting from the Option menu. 3 ) Select Input Setting from the submenu. 4 ) Select the desired Input (INPUT 4, INPUT 5, INPUT 6, or INPUT 7). 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. If operating an HDM I supported device using an HDMI port other than the terminal selecte d in Input Setting, the system malfunctions. When connecting to an HDMI terminal other than that selected in Input Settin g, the equipment settings should block HDMI Control func tions. The HDMI Contro l menu is not selectable when the option Inpu t Setting under th e HDMI Control Setting menu is set to Off . The control menu changes to suit the ty pe of HDMI-compatible equipment . When adding, changing, or removing equipment from HDMI Control, refer to the sections below for installati on notes and the supported commands. 5.3.1 Contr ol an AV System When adding an A V System, connect th e unit be tween the panel an d any rec orders and/ or play ers. T o fun ction properly , an Audio/V ideo system shou ld support the HDMI Control functi ons between th e panel and any other connected equipment. If the A V system does not support HD MI Control but the other equipmen t (pla yer/recorder) accept s this type of control than con nect the AV System through th e panel’ s DIGIT AL OUT using an optical dig ital cable and A UDIO OUT using an A V cable (commercially av ailable). The other equipment connects to the HDM I port using an HDMI compliant cable. Signals input from the HD MI are not output from DIGIT A L OUT . P ower Off T est P ower On T est Input Setting : INPUT 4 P ower Off Control : On P ower-On Read y : On Hold Sound Status : Off PRO151FD.book Page 88 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
89 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 During playback, use the remote control’s up/down arrows ( / ) to cycle throug h the surround sound options. Use the lef t/r ight arrows ( / ) to change the input. T o resume playback, return to the HDMI Control men u then select the function again. 5.3.2 Control a Recorder Pr e s s EN TER to st art playback or press HDMI CONTROL to return to the menu. Th is process also applies to Players. Refer to the chart below for available commands. Note: Y ou can also use  (Play),  (Stop),  (P ause),  (F ast F or ward) and  (F ast Reverse) on the remote control to conduct the same operations as the control menu buttons. 5.3.3 Control a Player Pr e s s EN TER to st art playback or press HDMI CONTROL to return to the menu. Th is process also applies to Recorders. R efer to the ch art below for available commands. Note: Y ou can also use  (Play),  (Stop),  (P ause),  (F ast F or ward) and  (F ast Reverse) on the remote control to conduct the same operations as the control menu buttons. AV Systems 1 Cycles the sur round mode in sequence 2 Switches the input source in revers e order 3 Switches the surroun d m ode in reverse order 4 Closes the screen to return to HDMI Control menu 5 Lists the connected equipment (model number) 6 Switches the input source in sequence 7 Reserved/Voi d Recorders 1 Skips commercials 2 Fast reve rse 3 Stops playback 4 Closes the screen to return to HDMI Control menu 5 Lists the connected equipment (model number) 6 Fast forward 7 Starts playback Players 1 Displays the DVD/Blu-ray disc menu on the player 2 Fast reve rse 3 Stops playback 4 Closes the screen to return to HDMI Control menu 5 Lists the connected equipment (model number) 6 Fast forward 7 Starts playback Exit HDMI Control **** INPUT INPUT - SURROUND SURROUND- 3 1 2 4 5 7 6 Exit HDMI Control **** 3 1 2 4 5 7 6 Exit HDMI Control **** MENU 3 1 2 4 5 7 6 PRO151FD.book Page 89 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
90 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 5.3.4 Add an AV Amp or a BD Play er T o add an A V amp and/or a BD Playe r , refer to the appro priate cabling diagram b elow . AV A m p & BD P la ye r BD Player only T W T W Rear view HDMI compliant cable (HDMI cable having the HDMI mark) AV c a b l e (commercially available) Optical digi tal cable (commercially available) BD player AV a m p T W T W HDMI compliant cable (HDMI cab le having the HDMI mark) AV c ab l e (comme rcially available) Optical digital cable (commercia lly available) BD player AV amp Rear view T W T W HDMI compliant cable (HDMI cable having the HDMI mark) Rea r v ie w BD player PRO151FD.book Page 90 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
91 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 5.4 Specific HDMI Control Commands When using HDMI equipment with your flat panel TV , some options in clude wh en to pow er the pane l and way s to turn other devices or features On and Off . This sect ion provides steps for commonl y desirable settin g changes. 5.4.1 Play Source Sound Using an HDMI Command When sound is coming from a Pio neer AV Sys tem through the flat panel TV , placing th e panel in Standby causes the sound to stop. T o have the sound continue when the flat panel TV turns On, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select HDMI Contro l Setting from the Option menu. 3 ) Select Hold Sound Status from the submenu. 4 ) Select On to allow sound from an A V System to play when the panel turns On . 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Note: T o have the sound continue when the flat panel TV turns On, confirm that the Switch to TV Sound opti on appears on the HDMI Control menu before turning the panel Off (see page 87). 5.4.2 Turn OFF the Power With an HDMI Command The “P ower Off Control” function is va lid for the devices connected to any of the panel’s HDMI ports. T o power off a connecte d device whe n the flat pan el TV is turned Off , foll ow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select HDMI Contro l Setting from the Option menu. 3 ) Select P ower Off Control from the submenu. 4 ) Select On to allow the panel to power off the connected equipment. 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. 5.4.3 Turn ON the Power With an HDMI Command The panel ships from the factor y with the P ower On command activated. If this fe ature is turned off in error , it can be reactivated. T o power on the flat panel TV automatica ll y when a connected P ioneer reco rder or play er is turned On and images are sent to th e panel, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select HDMI Contro l Setting from the Option menu. 3 ) Select Po w e r- O n Re a d y from the submenu. 4 ) Select On to have anot her device power - on the panel. 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. PRO151FD.book Page 91 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
92 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 5.4.4 Test the Power Control (On/ Off) Y our flat panel TV provides an HDMI control option to test equipment power when it is connected to the panel’s HDMI ports and it has been prop erly assigned to an Input. T o confirm th at the P ower On/O ff cont rol function is work ing, follow the steps be low . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup . 2 ) Select HDMI Control Setting from the Option menu. 3 ) Select a test option ( P ower On T est or P ower Off T est ) from the submenu. A list containin g all HDMI connected equipment appears. 4 ) Select a piece of equipment from the list. 5 ) Repeat this process to test other equipment from the list. 6 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu when all testing is com plete. If the P ower On/Off T est fails, check th e connection points and the settings. 5.5 Connect a Game Console or Camcorder Y our flat panel TV supplies direct co nnections for a ga me console, camc order , or other Audio/Visual (AV) equipment through INPUT 3. T o watch an image co ming from a game console or camcorder , press INPUT 3 on the remote control or repeatedly press INPUT on the panel to select INPUT 3. F or details on game console settings, refer to “ 2.6.2 Connect Y our Other P ioneer Equipment” and “4.1.4 Set the P anel to Recognize a Game Console.” Use the connection type specified by th e equipment. Connect equipme nt only to terminals that are actually to be used. 5.6 Use the IR REPEATER OUT Connecting control cables between the flat panel TV and other Pioneer equipment allow s to operate the connected equipmen t by sending commands from its remote cont rol to the remote control sensor on your fl at panel TV . This function is helpful when controlling P i oneer equipment from other Pioneer equipment. PRO151FD.book Page 92 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
93 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 5.7 Operate the Home Media Gallery With Home Medi a Galler y , you can enjoy digital content such as movies, music, and photo files on your high-end flat panel TV . Play content from fi les stored on one or more media servers connecte d by a home or local area network (LAN) or those stored on a USB flash dri ve. Af ter connecting via a broadb and router or an Ethernet hub to a media ser ver with network sof twa re, navigate through the digital conten t visible on the Home Media Gallery . The flat panel TV supports Mass Storage Class and PT P devices through USB inter face and DLNA-compatible devices through a net work. DLNA CERTIFIED™ Audio/Video/Image Player This unit complies with th e DLNA Networked Device Interoperabili ty Gu idelines - expanded: October 2006 (v1.5). When a PC runnin g DLNA ser ver software or o ther DLNA -compatible device is connected to this player , some setting changes of software or other devices may be requ ired. Please refer to the op erating instructions for the software or device for more information. PlaysForSure PlaysF orSure is a marketing ce rtification given by Microsoft. The PlaysF or Sure logo makes it ea sy to find digital media stores and devices th at work together . Digita l medi a purchased from on line stores carrying the PlaysF orSure logo is available for use on this unit. This unit complies with PlaysF orSure V ersion 2.20 Requirements Speci fication for Network Devices. Supported File Formats The following sections show supported file formats that can be played back or dis played on the flat panel TV . These formats are applicable to network sources. Most are al so ap plicable to USB source s. However , media ser ver content protected by digit al rights management such as WMDRM10 (Windows Media Digital Rights Management 10), may no t play on the panel. Supported Video Formats • Windows Media Video 9 (WMV9): MP@ML • Windows Media Video 9 (WMV9) Advanced P rofile (VC -1): AP@L1, MP@ML • MPEG -2 PS: MP@ML • MPEG -2 TS: MP@ML • MPEG -1 • MPEG -4 P art2 (SP/ASP): SP@L3, ASP@L5 • MPEG -4 P art10 (H.264/A VC): Main P rofile 3.0 Supported Audio Formats • Windows Media Audio 9 (W MA9): Samp ling rates; 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz • MPEG -1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3): Sampling rates; 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz • Linear PCM (WA V): Sampling rates; 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz • MPEG -4 AAC: Sampling rates; 16 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz • HE-AAC: Sampling rates; 16 kH z, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz Supported Image Formats • JPEG: Resolution; up to 3680 x 2760 pixels • PNG: Resolution; up to 3680 x 2760 pixels • GIF : Resolution; up to 3680 x 2760 pixels • TIFF : Resolution; up to 1600 x 1200 pixe ls • BMP : Resolution; up to 3072 x 2304 pixels Supported File Extensions This product supports the playback of files with the foll owing extensions. • Video: .wmv , .asf , .mpg, .mpeg, .m pe, .m2p, .m4v , .mp4v , .mp4, .mov • Audio: .wma, .mp3, .wav , .m4a, .aac • Image: .jpg, .jpeg, .png, .gif , .bmp, .tif , .tiff Note: Even the supported format files that are listed above may or may not play properly or completely , depending on the media ser ver , USB device, bit rate stream and other content characteristics, as well as other factors. PRO151FD.book Page 93 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
94 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV Even when files have a supported file extension, some f iles may not play or display properly , depending on the content or media ser ver type. Some formats may not be supported nor displayed on Home Media Gallery as formats that individual media ser vers support var y . Refer to the media ser ver manufactu rer ’s or other relev ant websites for supported formats. Although a p articular format is suppor ted, no t all content functions may oper ate pro perly . If the co ntent fails to appear properly , contact the content pr oducer for assistance. In addition, so me supported file formats may fail to play properly when imported from an unknown USB device. Note: Y ou cannot use the Home Media Galler y until dimmed elements on the menu screen turn white. Some Home Media Galler y functions, such as trick play during F ast Forward and Rewind, T ime Search and Search, may not work depending on the medi a ser ver ’s capability and functionality . Home Media Gallery complies with the DLNA Networ ked Device Interoperability Guidelines - expanded: October 2006 (v1.5) an d PlaysForSure V ers ion 2.20 Requirem ents Spec ification for Networ k Devices. If yo ur media server supports different DLNA a nd/or Pl aysF orSure version(s), some Home Media Galler y function( s) and content format(s) may no t be supported. P ioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of th e Home Media Galler y features due to communication error/malfunctio ns associated with your netw ork connection and/or your PC, or other conne cted equipment. Contact your PC manufa cturer o r Intern et ser vice provid er . Content may no t play or display properl y , depending on the conditions of use or media ser ver in use. The Home Media Galler y functions as a WMDRM10- ND (Microsoft Windows Media DRM for netw orked devices). Cont ent can only be navigated from the media servers that support WMDRM10-ND. Content ma y not play , depending on the DRM protection level. This system may not display conten t from incompatible memor y cards. 5.7.1 Network Connections T o connect to a network, set up the Home Media Ga ller y through the Home Media Galler y menu. P ress the HMG button on the remote control to cause the menu to appear . T o use the Home Media Gal ler y , connect to a home network (LAN) via an Ethernet hub or cable directly to a media server . Usable Media Servers A media server contains digital conten t such as movies, music, and photo file s. PCs that have pre-i nstalled media ser ver software and recorders with a media ser ver func tion are considered the media ser ver . There are some media ser vers that you can choose from; for example, Windows Media Connect, Windows Media Player that has a media sharing function, and DLNA compliant ser vers. • Windows Media Co nnect 2.0 Wind ows Media Connect runs on a 32-bit PC with W indows XP Ser vice P ack 2 (SP2) installed. When it is already instal led, you can enjoy Home Media Galler y using your PC. • Windows Media Player 11 for W indows XP Windows Media Player 11 features Medi a S ha r in g t ha t r un s o n a 32 - b i t P C wi th Wi n d ow s X P S e r v i c e Pa c k 2 (SP2) installed. If Windows Media Connect 2.0 is not installed in your PC, you can download W indows Media Player 11 from Microsoft’s website. • Windows Media Player 11 for W indows Vista Windows Medi a Player 11 is featur ed in 32-bit Windows V ista PCs. When selecting the most suit able media ser ver , please visit Microsoft’s website for system requirements, known issues, installation procedures , a nd other updated information . • DL NA CERTIFIED TM digital media servers The ser ver is a DLNA-certified digita l media server such as PC sof tware, PCs and other devices installed with DLNA-certified sof tware. When a PC running DLNA ser ver so f tware or other DLNA-compatible d evice is connected to th is player , some setting cha nges of th e software or device may be required. Refer to th e device(s) o perating instruct ions for more information. Chapter_05.fm Page 94 Friday, July 11, 2008 5:33 PM
95 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 Connect via an Ethernet Hub If already opera ting one or more media ser vers on a home or local area ne twork (LAN), connect the flat panel TV to the Ethernet (LAN) hub using a standard (“s traight-t hrough”) Ethernet (L AN) ca ble. See the diagram below . Note: Although the Home Media Galler y supports 10BASE- T , it is better to use 100BASE- TX for improved display quality and speed. Connect directly to a Media Server T o run a PC as a media ser ver , connect t he flat panel TV directly to the PC using a tw isted (“cross-over ”) Ethernet (LAN) cable. See the diagram below . T W T W Media server 2 Media server 1 Ethernet hub (Router with hu b function) Straight-through cable Rear view T W T W Media server 1 Rear view Cross-over cabl e PRO151FD.book Page 95 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
96 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV Confirm the IP Address After ma king the network connect ion, follow the instruct ions below to con firm the IP Add ress before accessing the network. (The setup is effective fo r Auto only . T o per form the procedure, DHCP on your ser ver or router must be valid. See “5.10 HMG Setup”) 1 ) P ress HMG on the remote control. The Home Media Galler y menu appears on screen . 2 ) Select HMG Setup . Use the arrow buttons to h ighlight an option. 3 ) P ress ENTER . 4 ) Select Network Setup . 5 ) Select Auto DHCP . The screen turns from “Select” mode to “Input” mode. 6 ) Select Ye s . 7 ) P ress RETURN . The HMG Setup screen returns. The IP Address is assi gned. The Home Media Galler y supports Auto IP and DHCP (D ynamic Host Configuratio n P rotoc ol). If the system failed to assign the IP Address or if you want to obtain different addresse s, select No then enter IP Address and Subnet mask. See Network Setup or HM G Setup to enter an address manually . F or information on DH CP , refer to netw ork device’s operating instru ctions. Y ou may need to contact your service provider or network administrator when manually entering an IP Address. Some media ser vers block or are pr ogrammed to block access to client ser vers. When connecting the flat panel TV , check the media ser ver for client ser ver access rights. 5.7.2 Connect a USB Device Y ou can also enjoy cont ent stored on memor y cards by connecting a USB de vice to the flat panel TV . The root directory or Device List screen appears as soon as a USB flash dri ve or a multi-card reader is connected to the USB port. Another option is to connect your digi tal came ra directly to the flat pa nel TV using a commercially available USB connector cable. If for any reason , the Folder/Content List or Devi ce List fails to appear , follow the steps below . 1 ) P ress HMG . The Home Media Galler y menu appears on screen . 2 ) Select USB . Use the arrow buttons to h ighlight an option. 3 ) P ress ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 ) Select the desired device. The USB Device screen must be displayed. 5 ) P ress ENTER to navig ate to a fold er or play a file/c ontent. T o return to the previous screen , press RETURN . 6 ) P ress EXIT or HMG to exit Home M edia Galler y . Note: The flat panel TV displays the US B Device screen or root director y immediate ly after inserting a USB dev ice. In this case, start from Step 5. When a multi-card reader is inserted, the USB Device screen is displayed. In this case, start from Step 4. PRO151FD.book Page 96 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
97 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 Note: Do not use any USB devices other than those sp ecifie d. Using other devices can cause a malfunction. Readable Data Format This system reads F A T16, F A T32 or NTFS. Readable Data Files Movie, music, and photo fil es play with the exception of Digital Rights Management (WMDRM10) protected files. Y our flat panel TV supports a single U SB device at a time. Also, the panel does not support USB hubs. This system may not be able to display mo dified or ed ited content from a PC or other equ ipment. Y our flat panel TV supports the USB Mass Storage Class and PTP devices. Some digital cameras may require a setup procedure for Ma ss Storage Class data transfer . The setup is done on the camera. See the operating instruct ions sup plied wit h the dig ital camera . Depend ing on th e type of your memor y card or camera, some images may fail to display . Remove a USB Device T o remove a USB device, exit the Home Medi a Galler y first then disconnect the device. Be sure to exit the Home Media Galler y screen before removing the USB device. If you remove the USB device while the Home Media Gallery screen is displa yed, data insid e the memor y may be damaged. Do not insert or remove the USB device immediately after th e system is switched On or Off . This action may cause data inside the memory to be damaged. P ioneer is not liable for any loss or damage to the data inside the USB flash drive. Flat Panel TV USB flash drive Digital Camera with USB Mass Storage Class (PTP also supported) Flash media via USB adapter (Multi-card Rea der) PRO151FD.book Page 97 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
98 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 5.8 Run the Home Media Gallery 1 ) P ress HMG . The Home Media Galler y menu appears on screen . 2 ) Select Media Navigator , USB, HMG Playlist or HMG Setup . Use the arrow buttons to h ighlight an option t hen press ENTER . T o return to the previous screen , press RETURN . 3 ) P ress EXIT or HMG to exit Home M edia Galler y . Use the Media Navigator By selecting Media Navigator , the previously selected se r ver menu automatically ap pears on the screen. When only one ser ver is fo und, the system auto matical ly connect s the ser ver . Y ou can also use the TOOLS Menu to switch to another ser ver or manually select a ser ver fr om the Ser ver List. The screen automatically changes to the Ser ver List if there are no previous ser vers. 1 ) P ress HMG . The Home Media Galler y menu appears on screen . 2 ) Select Media Navi gator . Use the arrow buttons to h ighlight an option t hen press ENTER . A ser ver menu appears . The file /folder con figurat ion may var y depending on the se r ver selected. 3 ) Select a desired server from the Ser ver List. 4 ) Select the desired folder to na vigate or file/content to play . 5 ) P ress ENTER . The appropriate Player launches and begins playing the selected file. T o return to the previous screen , press RETURN . 6 ) P ress EXIT or HMG to exit Home M edia Galler y . Note: The Media Navigator launch depends on the option selected in Auto Connection under “5.10 HMG Setup.” Select a ser ver from the Ser ver list to open Media Nav igator . Media Navigator USB HMG Playlist HMG Setup M o vi e M us i c Ph o t o 4 U ser File s (Sample screen) PRO151FD.book Page 98 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
99 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 Navigate through a USB Device’s Files and Folders Like navigating through med ia ser vers, select the specific file from a device o n the USB Device s creen to start an appropriate player . F or details, follow the steps below . 1 ) P ress HMG . The Home Media Gallery menu appears on screen. 2 ) Select USB . Use the arrow buttons to high light an option then press ENTER . The USB Device screen appears. Select the device. Wh en using a single director y device (USB flash drive), the USB Device screen does not appear . 3 ) Select the desired folder to na vigate or file/conten t to play . 4 ) P ress ENTER . The appropriate Player launches and begins playing the selected file. T o return to the previous screen , press RETURN . 5 ) P ress EXIT or HMG to ex it Home Media Ga ller y . Note: The USB Device screen appears when us ing a multi-card reader or multiple flash drive devices. In this case, select the device containing the desired content. USB A USB B USB C USB D USB E USB F USB G 15 (Sample screen) PRO151FD.book Page 99 Thursday, Jul y 10, 2008 3:58 PM
100 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV Screen Components Screen display options are: •L i s t • T humbna il • Thu mbnail List P ress TOOLS then select Change V iew from the TOOLS Menu to choose from the screen display options. T he options are available for Movie, Music and Photo menus. 1. Item being selected 2. Number of total items 3. Scroll bar (displayed when one or more pages follow) 4. Icon or thumbnail of the selected item (if obtained) Fo l de r 1 Fo l de r 2 F older 3 C ontent 3 C ontent 2 C ontent 5 C ontent 4 4 0 4 3 1 2 4 0 1 2 3 Content 2 Folder 3 Content 3 C ontent 1 F o l de r 2 40 3 1 2 Thumbnail screen Thumbnail List screen List screen (Sample screens) PRO151FD.book Page 100 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
101 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 HMG Playlist Each categor y (Movie, Music, and Photo) has five different Playlists with up to 100 files each. The HMG Playlist can contain sound and image files selected in “Media Navigator ”. T o edit a Playlist, use the TOOLS Menu. 1 ) P ress HMG . The Home Media Gallery menu appears on screen. 2 ) Select HMG Playlist . Use the arrow buttons to high light an option then press ENTER . 3 ) Select Movie, Music or Photo from the HMG Playlist screen. 4 ) Select a desired list from Playlist 1 through Playlist 5. 5 ) Select the desired content. This menu can appear as a List, Thumbnail or Thumbnail List screen. P ress TOOLS then select Change view from the TOOLS Menu to cycle through the views. 6 ) P ress ENTER to play the content. The appropriate Player launches and begins playing the selected file. T o return to the previous screen , press RETURN . 7 ) P ress EXIT or HMG to ex it Home Media G aller y . 5.8.1 Show Your Movie Files on th e Flat Panel TV When selecting movie content from the server menu on the Media Navigator screen or USB Device screen , the Movie Player automat ically launches. Select a categor y , folder , or device to access the submenu cont aining the file or content. Selecting a movie file from the HMG Playli st causes the Movie Player screen to appear , just like selecting a file from a ser ver . Screen Components The following info rmation automatically appears on scre en for a few seconds when Movie Player launches or playback status changes (contro lled by the remote, for example). P ressing DISPLAY or selecting Information on the TOOLS Menu also causes the informatio n to appear . M o vi e M us i c Ph o t o 3 MovieTITLE _ 012345 6 Al bu m N a m e P la y bac k 00 : 0 2: 0 1 /00 : 05 :2 4 YYYY / MM / D D 1 1 9 1 2 6 7 8 4 3 5 Durin g A-B Rep eat mode (Content info rmation) 1. Album name 2. Content title 3. Date (Player status) 4. Playback status ( status i con, stat us informati on, current time/t otal time) 5. Progress bar 6. Sound mode 7. Play mode 8. Random mode 9. A-B Repeat mode PRO151FD.book Page 101 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
102 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV Movie Player key guide Note: Some functions may not be supported depend ing on the ser ver type or software version. During playback, an error may arise in time-related info rmation, depending on the content or ser ver sof tware. Also, some functi ons may not be supported, depending on the content. Mode Key(s) used Function Playback ENTER,  (PLAY) Pla ys back the content Stop  ( STOP), RETURN Stops the Movie Player and retu rns to the previous screen (List/Thumbnail /Thumbnail List) PA U S E ENTER,  (PAUSE) P auses the playback Fa s t F o r w a r d  (FF),  F ast forward while playback. Each press toggles the F ast F o r ward speed. T o discontinue F ast Forward, press ENTER or PLAY . Normal playback mode returns. Fa s t R e v e r s e  (RWD),  F ast reverse while play back. Each press toggles the F ast R everse speed. T o discontinue F ast Reverse, pr ess ENTER or PLAY . Normal playback mode returns. Slow F or ward   ,   Slow forward when in P AUSE. Each press toggles the Slow F or ward speed. T o discontinue Slow F or ward, press ENTER or PLAY . Normal playback mode returns. Note: This function may not be supported, depending on the content. F orward (15 sec.)  Skips 15 seconds for ward then plays back the v ideo or pauses while in P AUSE Rev e rs e ( 15 s e c. )  Skips 15 seconds backward then plays back the video or pauses while in P AUSE Tim e S ea r c h TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Add to HMG Playlist TO OLS See Use the TOOLS Menu A-B Repeat TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Ran d om TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Play Mode TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Audio TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Pi c t u r e TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Sound TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Me nu Information TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu PRO151FD.book Page 102 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
103 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 Content obtained from a digital video camera that suppo rts H. 264/AVC format can be played through the USB port. T o play content from this type of camera, follow the steps below . 1 ) Insert the USB flash drive containing the content in to a card rea der connected to the flat pane l TV . The USB device’s F older/Contents List appears on screen. Refe r to the operation manual that came with the individual device for connection and setting help. 2 ) Select a F older/Contents List. Use the arrow buttons to high light an option then press ENTER . 3 ) Select the desired content. Note: Some content may not be played back or may be a short delay between audio and video, depending on the file. Not all files (including edited files) may be supported wi th the Movie P layer . Stored content may not appear in the “Shortcut” folder , depending on the saved position in the memor y device. Also, content may not p lay properly , de p ending on th e USB card rea der used. 5.8.2 Play Your Music Files on the Flat Panel TV When selecti ng music content from the server menu (o n the Media Navigator screen or from the USB Device screen), the Music Player automatica lly lau nches. S elect a categor y , fold er , or device to access the submenu containing your file or cont ent. S electing a music file from HMG Playlist causes the Music Player screen to appear , just like selecting a file from a server . After playing music content th rough once, the music cont en t loop s as backgroun d music (BGM). T o stop looping, stop the playbac k, exit th e Home Media G aller y or start playing content oth er than photo content. Screen Components The following information and playback status app ear on the Music Player screen. Arti s t : XXXX X Al bu m : XXXX X XXXXXX.mp3 Previous Song XXXXXX.mp3 Next Song 3 1 2 1. Artist/album information 2. Music Player thumbnail icon/j acket image 3. Player list P la y bac k 00:02:01/00:05:24 YYYY/MM/DD 8 4 5 6 9 7 4. Play mode 5. Random mode 6. Playback statu s (status icon, status information, current time/t otal time) 7. Progress bar 8. A-B Repeat mode 9. Date During A-B Repeat mode PRO151FD.book Page 103 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
104 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV Music Player key guide Note: Files may not play properly , depending on the content. Some functions may not be supported, depending on the server type or sof tware version. Playback continues. P ressing RETURN to move from the Player screen to the previously selected screen has no effect. 5.8.3 Show Your Photo File on the Flat Panel TV When selecting photo content from the Media Navig ator ’s ser ver menu or from the USB Device screen, the Photo Player automatically launches. P ress ENTER to s h o w co n t e nt i n f u ll s c r e e n. S e lect a categor y , folder or device to access the submen u containing your file or content. Selecting a photo file from the HMG Playli st causes the Ph oto Player screen to appear , just like selecti ng a file from the ser ver . Screen Components The following information automatical l y appears on screen for a few seconds when Photo Player laun ches or playback status ch anges (controlled by the remote, for example). Pre ssing DISPLAY or selecting Information on the TOOLS Menu also causes the information to appear . Mode Key(s) used Function Playback ENTER,  (PLAY) Plays back the selected content Stop  ( STOP),  Stops the playback PA U S E ENTER,  (PAUSE) P auses the playback Fa s t F o r w a r d  (FF) See the Movi e Player key guide  P ress and hold  to start F a st F or ward. When in F ast F or ward, press  to change the playback speed. T o discontinue F ast Forward, press ENTER or PLAY . Normal playback mode returns. Fa s t R e v e r s e  (RWD) See the Movi e Player key guide  P ress and hold  to start F ast Reverse. When in F ast Reverse, pres s  to change th e playback speed. T o discontinue F ast Reverse, press ENTER or PLAY . Normal playback mode returns. Next  Selects the next content P revious  Selects the previous content Tim e S ea r c h TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Add to HMG Playlist TO OLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Ran d om TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu A-B Repeat TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Play Mode TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Sound TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Me nu Photo TITLE_0123456 Album Name P la y bac k 45678/99999 YYYY/MM/DD 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 (Content information) 1. Album na me 2. Content title 3. Date (Player status) 4. Playback status (status icon, status information , current number/total number) 5. P rogress bar 6. Play mode 7. Random mode PRO151FD.book Page 104 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
105 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 Photo Player key guide Note: Some functions may not be supported, depending on the ser ver type or software version . Even files in the supported fo rmat may fail to pl ay proper ly , depending on the content. Mode Key(s) used Function Playback ENTER,  (P LAY) Starts displaying a photo or playing a slideshow when in playback Stop  (STOP), RETURN Stops the Player and returns to the previous scre en (List/ Thumbnail/Thu mbnail List) PA U S E EN TER while playback,  (PAUSE) P au ses the s lidesho w Move F ile F or ward  Displays the next image content Move File Backward  Displays the previous image content Rot ate (c lo ck wi se )  (FF), TOOL S R otates the image 90 o clockwise. Each press t oggles the rotati on angle by 90 o between 90 o , 180 o , 270 o and 0 o . (See Use the TOOLS Menu ) Rot ate (c ou nt er- clockwise)  (RWD) R otates the image 90 o counter -clockwise. Each press t oggles the rotati on angle by 90 o between 270 o , 180 o , 90 o and 0 o . Change BGM  ,  Switches BGM c ontent w hile p laying B GM Zoom TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Add to HMG Playlist TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Ran dom TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Play Mode T OOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Slide Show T OOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Music P layer T OOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Pi c t ur e TOOL S See Use the TOOLS Menu Sound TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu Information TOOLS See Use the TOOLS Menu PRO151FD.book Page 105 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
106 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 5.9 Use the TOOLS Menu P ressing TOOLS on the remote control causes the TOOLS Menu to appear . Select various play and display modes from this menu. The selectab le menu items differ , depending on the curre n t menu (refer to “3.6.1 Use the TOOLS Menu”). Update Server List Use this function to update the current ly selected Server List. This option is available on the Ser ver List screen regardless if the ser ver is conn ected to your flat pa nel TV . 1 ) P ress TOOLS while showing the Ser ver List. The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 2 ) Select Update Ser ver List from the TOOLS Menu. Use the arrow buttons to h ighlight an option t hen press ENTER . Information on the connected ser ver is updated. Delete Server Y our flat panel TV allows disconnected ser vers to be removed from the Ser ver List. T o delete a server , follow the steps below . This option is available on the Ser ver List screen (ser ver not connected). 1 ) P ress TOOLS while the cursor is on the unconnected ser ver on the Ser ver List screen. The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 2 ) Select Delete Ser ver from the TOOLS Menu. A Delete Ser ver screen appears. 3 ) Select Ye s then press ENTER . The ser ver disappears from the list. T o cancel the server deletion, select No . USB Device The TOOLS menu provides a screen to see what USB device (s) are connected or supporte d. Follow the directio ns below to op en the USB Device screen. This op tion is available on the Fo lder/Contents List (USB) screen. 1 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 2 ) Select USB Device from the TOOLS Menu. A USB Device screen appears, show ing currently c onnected USB device s. TELEVISION TOOLS Update Server List Music Player TELEVISION TOOLS Delete Server Update Server List TELEVISION TOOLS USB Device Picture PRO151FD.book Page 106 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
107 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 Favorites Entry Registering the Home Medi a Galler y in F avorites (TOOLS Me nu) provides quick access to the Home Media Galler y top screen while watching TV or other programs. This option i s available on the Home Media Galler y screen. 1 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Me nu appears on sc reen. 2 ) Select F avorites Entr y . 3 ) Set the option to On then press ENTER . Registration completes. T o remove the Home Media Gallery from F avorites, select Off . Detailed Display Select this option to display the detailed information on th e current co ntent. Th is option is available on the Media Navigator , Playlist Li st (Movie/Music/P hoto), and Folder/ Contents List screens. 1 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Me nu appears on sc reen. 2 ) Select Detailed Display from the TOOLS Menu. Detailed inform ation appears. Pr e s s i n g RETURN causes the information to disappear and the previous screen to return. Sort A sort option is availa ble under Media Navigator and F old er/Contents List screens. Th is function is unavailable for folders or content on a USB device. T o sort the item s contained in the F older/Con tents List, follow the steps below . 1 ) P ress HMG . The Home Media Gallery menu appears on screen. 2 ) Select the desired folder and/or content in the Media Navi gator . Use the arrow buttons to high light an option then press ENTER . 3 ) P ress TOOLS then select Sort from the TOOLS Menu. A Sort dialog screen appears. 4 ) Select the appropriate option on the Sort di alog screen. • Condition: T itle, T rack Number , Genre, Artist or Date. TELEVISION TOOLS Fav orite Entry : Off On Delete from HMG Playlist TELEVISION TOOLS Detailed Display Delete Server Start Condition : Title Order : Bottom-Up Sort PRO151FD.book Page 107 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
108 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV • Order: Bottom-Up or T op-Down 5 ) Select Start on the So rt dialog sc reen. The sorting starts based on your selec ti on and sort results are displayed. While sorting continues, content playback is available. T o return to the so rt screen , press RETURN any time during playback. T o cancel the sort mode, press RETURN . Notes: The “Select a sorting order .” scre en is available and may be left on the screen while navigating through the music categories. Sort may not be available, de pending on the ser ver used. Available submenus for Condition va ry , depending on the ser ver used. Search The flat panel TV’s built- in Search fu nction provides a convenient way to find items he ld in a Folder/Conten ts List. However , the searching function is unavaila ble for folders or content on a USB device. Simply enter a word and the re sults appe ar on screen. T o begin a S earch, follow the directions below . Th is option is available on the Media Navigato r and F older/Contents List screens. 1 ) P ress HMG . The Home Media Galler y menu appears on screen . 2 ) Select the desired folder and/or content in the Media Navigator . Use the arrow buttons to h ighlight an option t hen press ENTER . 3 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 4 ) Select Search from the TOOLS Menu. A Search dialog screen appears. 5 ) Select Tit le , G e nr e or Artist for Condition , or enter a Keyword . Pr e s s i n g ENTER on the Keyword menu causes the software keyboard to appear on the screen. 6 ) Enter the word on the sof tware keyboard. Refer to “Sof tware Key board” unde r “3.2.5 Cr eate the List of Channe ls” for opera tion detail s. 7 ) Select OK on the software keyboard to brin g up the Search dialog screen and hide the keyboard. T o cancel the key word entr y , select Cancel. 8 ) Select Start on the Sea rch dialog screen . The searching starts based on the word ente red with results are appearing on screen. While searching continues, cont ent is playable. T o return to the search screen , press RETURN any time during playback. T o cancel the search mode, press RETURN . Notes: The Search function may not be available, depending on the ser ver . Available submenus for Condition va ry , depending on the ser ver used. Start Condition : Title K e y w o r d : ---- Search PRO151FD.book Page 108 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
109 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 Slide Show A slideshow is simply a series of stil l pictures, appearing one af ter the other , usually in a timed procession . Select the desired photo file to display a still picture then press ENTER to start a slideshow . After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles between PLA Y and P AUSE. Or press PLAY to start the slideshow immediately . This option is available on the Media Navigator , F older/Contents List , and Photo Player . Y ou can set the Photo Player to play a slideshow wi th background music (BGM) and various visual effects. T o begin a slideshow , follow the directions below . 1 ) P ress HMG . The Home Media Gallery menu appears on screen. 2 ) Select Media Navigator or USB from the menu. Use the arrow buttons to high light an option then press ENTER . 3 ) Select a folder cont aini ng photo content. Use the arrow buttons to high light a folder then pre ss ENTER . The Thumbnail scree n appears (Thumbnail List or List scree n appears, depending on the setting) . 4 ) Select the desired photo file. The selected phot o content appears in full screen. 5 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Me nu appears on sc reen. 6 ) Select a slideshow option . 7 ) Select Random, Off , Black Out, Cr oss Sweep, Horizontal Blinds, Box ed In/Out, P anoram ic or Scenic for Effect. 8 ) Select Off or On for Monochrome . 9 ) Select a time inter val: 3Seconds, 5Seconds, 10Sec onds, 15Seconds, 30Seconds or 60Seconds . 10 ) T urn th e Random option Off or On . F or details, refer to R andom. 11 ) Select the desired option f or Play Mode . Select Single, R epeat, Repeat All or All. F or details, refer to “Play Mode” (page 111). 12 ) Select any desired BGM . Select mu sic conte nt from Pla ylist 1 throu gh 5 or the U SB device. 13 ) Select Start . The slideshow starts and photo images in th e folder automatically appear one by one. T o force the next image to appear , press  . T o force the previous image to return, press  . 14 ) P ress ENTER or  (P ause) to stop the slideshow . The Photo Player pauses. 15 ) P ress ENTER again to resume the slideshow . T o cancel the slideshow and stop the Photo Player , press RETURN or  (Stop) du ring playback. The previous screen returns. Note: Af ter setting the Inter val time, it may take longer than the preset time. As the Interval time refers to the time length up until the Home Media Galler y starts to obtain the next image. Key operations may not work while obtaining the next image. Start Effect : Blac k Out Monochrome : Off Interval : 5Seconds Random : Off Play Mode : Repeat All BGM : Off Slide Show PRO151FD.book Page 109 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
110 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV Add to HMG Playlist The Home Media Galler y function provides “HMG Playli st” – a self-contained play list that allows bookmarking favorite movie, music, and photo files from the network. Y ou can store, e dit, and sort up t o 100 fil es in ea ch Playli st List. This option is avai lable on the Media Navigator , F older/Contents List, Movie Player , Music Player , and Photo Player screens. 1 ) While navigating or playing, select the file to be added to a HMG Playlist. 2 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 3 ) Select Add to HMG Playlist from the TOOLS M enu. An Add to HMG Playlist dialog screen appears. 4 ) Select a Playlist. Pr e s s  /  to select from Playlist 1 to Playlist 5. 5 ) Select OK . T o select other Playlist(s), repea t Steps 2 to 5. The file is adde d to the selected Playlist. The T otal field changes as co ntent is adde d to the play list. T o cancel the operation , press RETURN . Select Server When one or more servers are connecte d within the network, you can switch between ser vers. This option is available on the Media Navigator and F older/Contents List screens. 1 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 2 ) Select Select Server from the TOOLS Menu. The Ser ver List appears. 3 ) Select the desired ser ver . The screen changes to Media Navi gator on the selected ser ver . Notes: The Home Media Gallery can memorize previous ly connected ser vers. When the Media Navigator is launched, available ser vers are au tomatically located an d connected. If a previously connected server cannot be found or if the server is in sleep mode, the ser ver name is dimmed. In some cases, media ser vers that support “ W ake On LA N” can be booted up. Sele ct the ser ver then press ENTER to transmit a “ W ake On L AN” command to th e highlighted ser ver . When having “ W ake On L AN” turns the ser ver ’s powe r on, the server must be ready with the necessar y settings al ready completed. Add to : Playlist 1 [T otal] : 050/100 Add to HMG Playlist OK Server 01 Server 02 Server 03 Server 04 4 (Sample screen) Chapter_05.fm Page 110 Thursday, July 10, 2008 4:08 PM
111 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 Play Mode Y our flat panel TV provides four repeat modes when usin g the Mov ie Player , Music Player , or Photo Player . Choose a playback mode (R epeat, Single, etc.) when playing multi ple content files. T o activate Play Mode, follow the steps below . 1 ) While playing content, press TOOLS. The TOOLS Me nu appears on sc reen. 2 ) Select Play Mode from the TOOLS Menu. Select S ingle, Repeat, Repeat All o r All. Single : Plays the selecte d content only once Rep e a t : Plays the selected content in a loop Rep e a t A l l : Loop-plays all contents in a folder i n order (when the last content file ends, the first file begi ns to play with all subsequent files playing in order continually) All : Plays all selected folder content in order only once Change Name Playlist (1 through 5) ca n be renamed in HMG Playlist. T o name a Playlist, follow the dire ctions below . This option is available on the Playlist Li st (Movie/Music/Photo) screen. 1 ) P ress TOOLS while five Playlists in the HMG Playlist are on screen . The TOOLS Me nu appears on sc reen. 2 ) Select Change Name from the TOOLS Menu. The software keyboard appears. 3 ) Enter the new name. Refer to “Sof tware Keyboard” unde r “3.2.5 Create the List of Channels” for operation details. 4 ) Select OK after the new name is entere d on the sof tware keyboard. The software keyboard disappears and the newly named Playlist appears. Selecting Cancel caus es the entr y to st op and cancel s the name entr y process. TELEVISION TOOLS All Play Mode : Single Sound Random A-B Repeat Time Search Repeat 1234567890 ABCDE F GH I J K LM NOPQRS T U VWX Y Z , . : ; &' ( ) - * /_ @ / $ % ! ? # =|~ " ^`< >[ ] { } OK Cancel Caps Space Delete Playlist Name P L A Y L I ST 1 PRO151FD.book Page 111 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
112 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV Change View Select this option to cycle between the different views: List, Thumbnail, and Th umbn ail List. This option is available on the Playlist List (Movie/Music /Photo), and F older/Contents List screens. 1 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 2 ) Select Change V iew from the TOOLS Menu . Select the screen opt ion from List , Thumbn ail or Thum bnail List. Time Search The T ime Search functio n allows the co ntent to start playing at the preset ti me. This option is available on the Movie Player and Music Player screens. T o allow Tim e Search, follow the steps below . 1 ) W hile playing content, press TOO LS. The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 2 ) Select Tim e S ea rc h from the TOOLS Menu. A Time Search di alog screen appears. 3 ) Enter the time (Hour , Minute and/or Second) to jump to. Enter Hour an d Minute for movie conten t or Minute and Second for music conten t. Use / or buttons 0 to 9 (if a numeric key icon app ears). Pr e s s / to select Hour an d Minute (movie content) or Minut e and Second (music conten t). 4 ) Select Start then press ENTER to begin the time search. The movie (music) beg ins playing from the se t time. T o cancel the Time Search, press RETURN . Note: The Time Search function may not be supported, de pending on the content, ser ver software or sof tware version. An error may arise in time-related information, depending on the content or server sof tware. TELEVISION TOOLS Thumbnail List Chang e View : List Music Player Add to HMG Playlist Sort Search Sort Search Thumbnail Fo l de r 1 Fo l de r 2 F older 3 C ontent 3 C ontent 2 C ontent 5 C ontent 4 4 0 4 0 Content 2 Folder 3 Content 3 Content 1 F o l de r 2 40 List screen Thumbnail screen Thumbnail List screen TOOLS Menu (Sample screens) Start [T otal] : 01:00:00 Jum p : Time Search 00 00 00 : : PRO151FD.book Page 112 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
113 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 Picture The P icture option is another way to ad just the image quality . Th is option is available on the Movie Player and Photo Player screens. T o adjust th e picture, follow the steps below . 1 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Me nu appears on sc reen. 2 ) Select Pi c t u r e from the TOOLS Menu. A picture adjustment screen appears. F or adjustme nt items, see “3.4 Adju st the P icture and Sound Quality .” 3 ) P ress RETURN to close the adjustment screen . Normal playback screen returns. Sound This Sound option is another way to adjust audio quality . This optio n is ava ilable on the M ovie Pla yer , Mu sic Play er and Photo Player screens. T o adjust the sound, follo w the steps below . 1 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Me nu appears on sc reen. 2 ) Select Sound from the TOOLS M enu. A sound adjustment screen appears. F or adjustment items, see “3.4 Adju st the P icture and Sound Quality .” 3 ) P ress RETURN to close the adjustment screen . Normal playback screen returns. Information The Information option displa ys the status information on the playing co ntent. This option is available on the Movie Player and Photo Player screens. T o show in formation during playback, follow the steps below . 1 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Me nu appears on sc reen. 2 ) Select Information from the TOOLS Menu. An information (such as pla yback status) screen appears. Pressing DISPLAY also causes the information screen to appear . The screen automatically disappears after a short period of time. TELEVISION TOOLS Picture Sound Random Information TELEVISION TOOLS Sound Random Play Mode TELEVISION TOOLS Information Zoom PRO151FD.book Page 113 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
114 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV Audio Use this option to switch to anothe r audio source if the currently played content has multip le audio sources (multi-language content, for ex ample). This op tion is av ailabl e on the M ovi e Player screen. T o reveal multiple audio tracks, follow the steps below . 1 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 2 ) Select Audio from the TOOLS Menu. Pr e s s i n g / causes L, R or L R to be se lected . If th e conte nt has multip le aud io sou rces, select L, R or L R for each source. 3 ) After entering the setting, press RETURN . Music Player The Music Player option allows changing BGM on any sc re en rather than using the music from the content. This option is only avai lable wh en music is played on any screen other than Movie Player and Music Player . Music Player is available on the Media Navigator , Folder/Content s List, USB, HMG Pl aylist, Play list List, and Photo Player screens. T o activate Music Pl ayer , follow the steps below . 1 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 2 ) Select Music Player from the TOOLS Menu. The Music Player screen appears. After en tering the setting, press RETURN . The previous screen returns. Move T o show files in your preferred order , use the Move option to chan ge the li sting order in the HMG Playlist. Thi s option is available on the Cont ents List (Playlist) screen . 1 ) Move the cursor to the content to be moved within the HMG Playlist. 2 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 3 ) Select Move from the TOOLS Menu. 4 ) P ress / to move the content up or down. TELEVISION TOOLS Audio : 1 L R 1 L Information Add to HMG Playlist A-B Repeat Time Searc h TELEVISION TOOLS Music Player Slide Show TELEVISION TOOLS Move USB Device PRO151FD.book Page 114 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
115 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 5 ) P ress ENTER . Editing completes and Move finishes. Delete from HMG Playlist Sometimes a file is no longer wanted. Y o ur flat panel TV provides a method to delete content from a HMG Playlist. This option is available on the Conte n ts List (Playlist) screen. T o delete content from a Playli st, follow the steps below . 1 ) M ove the cursor to the content to be deleted from the HMG Playlist. 2 ) P ress TOOLS . The TOOLS Me nu appears on sc reen. 3 ) Select Delete from HMG Playlis t on the TOOLS Menu. A Delete from HMG Playlist dialog screen appears. 4 ) Select Ye s to remove the co ntent item . The dialog screen disappears and the selected content is deleted from the HMG Playlist. T o cancel, selec t No. A-B Repeat Mode Use this option to play the selected movie scenes or mu sic programs repeatedly . This option is available only during normal playback on the Movie Player or Music Player . T o set Repeat, follow the steps below . 1 ) While playing content, press TOOLS . The TOOLS Me nu appears on sc reen. 2 ) Select A-B Repeat from the TOOLS Menu . 3 ) P ress ENTER to mark a starting poin t. 4 ) P ress ENTER again where the playback needs to stop. The Player status appears on the s creen and th e A-B Repeat mode icon changes. The selected part of the conten t begins lo oping. T o end the looping and return to normal playback, press TOOLS then select Off whi le in the A-B Repeat mode. Note: If the screen display fails to match the player stat us, a malfunction may have occurred. St op playback then tr y the operation again. TELEVISION TOOLS Delete from HMG Playlist Move TELEVISION TOOLS A-B Repeat : A(Loop Start) Rotate PRO151FD.book Page 115 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
116 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV Random Use this option to shuffle the order in the content list, pl aying the content at random. T his option is available on the Movie Player , Music Player and Photo Player screen s. T o shuffle the playlist, follow the steps below . 1 ) W hile playing content, press TOO LS . The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 2 ) Select Ran do m from the TOOLS Menu. 3 ) Select On . Ran d o m Rep e a t p la y b ac k s t ar t s. T o cancel the random mode, pres s TOOLS and select Off . Note: Random Repeat is only available for content pl aying in Repeat Mode (except when Single is selected). Rotate Use the Rotate option to turn an image 90º clockwise. This option is available on the Photo Player screen. T o rotate an image, follow th e steps belo w . 1 ) While photo content appears, press TOOLS . The TOOLS Menu ap pears on screen. 2 ) Select Rotate from the TOOLS Menu. Each press of the ENTER button causes th e displayed image to rotate by one quarter clockwise. It togg les between 90º, 180º, 270º and 0º. Note: The selected rotation angle is only effective for the visible image. Moving or changing the content causes the image to reset to the default view . TELEVISION TOOLS Random : Off On Change Name TELEVISION TOOLS Rotate : 90 Time Search PRO151FD.book Page 116 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
117 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 Zoom Use the Zoom opti on to enlarg e the photo content displayed. This option is available on the Photo Player screen . T o enlarge content, fo ll ow the steps below . 1 ) W hile photo content ap pears, press TOOLS . The TOOLS Me nu appears on sc reen. 2 ) Select Zoom from the TOOLS Menu. 3 ) P ress / to select On or Off . 4 ) P ress ENTER to co nfirm the se lection. Selecting On causes the enlarged photo content to always appear . Displayed image differs depending on the content. If the cont ent’s aspect ratio is longer than 16:9, it appears fully stretche d horizontally to both sides with images cropped at th e top and bottom. If the content’s aspect ratio is wider than 16:9, it appears fu lly stretched vertically to top and bottom with images cropped on the r ight and left sides. A “zoom” ico n appears on screen . 5 ) W hile in Zoom mode, use the a rrow buttons to sc roll the conten t. Pr e s s  or  if the content’s aspect ra tio is longer than 16:9,  or  if the cont ent’s aspec t ratio is wide r than 16:9. 6 ) P ress RETURN or ENTER to cancel the Zoom and retu rn to the normal screen. Note: The Zoom function is disable d when the content is a 16:9 picture. TELEVISION TOOLS Zoom : Off On Music Player Add to HMG Playlist Chapter_05.fm Page 117 Thursday, July 10, 2008 4:08 PM
118 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 5.10 HMG Setup Use the HMG Setup opt ion for Network Setup, Auto Connec tion Setup and Default Setti ngs. F or more information about each option , refer to the following sections. Network Setup Select whether to acquire the IP A ddress automatically or manually or , when acquiring manually , set the IP Address and Subnet mask. T o access the Ne twork Setu p menu, follow the steps below . Automatic: T o per form the procedure, DHCP on yo ur ser ver or router must be valid. 1 ) P ress HMG . The Home Media Galler y menu appears on screen . 2 ) Select HMG Setup from the menu. Use the arrow buttons to h ighlight an option t hen press ENTER . 3 ) Select Network Setup . 4 ) Select Auto DHCP . 5 ) Select Ye s . The flat panel TV seeks and acqui res an IP Address if available. 6 ) P ress EXIT or HMG to exit Home M edia Galler y . Manual: Before activating, check your media server for IP Address and S ubnet mask information . 1 ) Access the Network Setup through the HMG Setup . 2 ) Select Auto DHCP . 3 ) Select No . 4 ) Select the appropriate box. Use  or  to highlight an entr y item (IP Ad dress or Subnet mask) then press ENTER . No need to enter Default Gateway and DNS Ser ver data. 5 ) Enter the figures using buttons 0 to 9 . Subnet mask (such as 255.255.255 .0): Enter the same figures. IP Address (such as 192.168.201.***): Enter the same fi gures as used in the media ser ver (PC, etc.). F or ***, enter 3-digit figures (0 – 254) that have not been used for other network connections. Use  or  to highlight other entr y areas. 6 ) P ress ENTER on the appropriate box af ter the entr y is complete . Repeat Steps 4 to 5 to complete Network setup. 7 ) P ress EXIT or HMG to exit Home M edia Galler y . Network Setup Default Settings Auto Connection On PRO151FD.book Page 118 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
119 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 Auto Connection Set Auto Connection to automatically connect to the la st accessed ser ver . F or selection , follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Auto Connection through the HMG Setup . 2 ) Use  or  to change the setting. Selecting ON causes the display to access the last serv er . If the ser ver is in Standby , a WOL (“ W ake On LAN”) is sent to turn the last accessed server On. Selecting OFF causes a ser ver list to appear on screen. “ W ake on L AN (WOL)” turns the last accessed ser ver ’s power on if the ser ver is WOL -compliant and is in Standby or sleep mode, once the ser ver is awake, th e Media Navigator screen appears. While your flat panel TV attempts to wake th e ser ver , a dialog screen appears. If the ser ver is not WOL -compliant or the WOL function fails, a notice appears on the Ser ver List screen. 3 ) P ress EXIT or HMG to ex it Home Media G aller y . Reset to Default Occasionally it may be easier to return your flat panel T V to the HMG defaul t values rather than tr y to correc t a large number of accidental entries. T o restore default se ttings within the Home Medi a Gallery , follow the steps below . 1 ) Access Default Settin gs through the HMG Setup . 2 ) Select Ye s . The default va lues return and the Home Media Galler y screen appears. 3 ) P ress EXIT or HMG to ex it Home Media G aller y . 5.11 Other useful functions Screen Save r During navigation, the screen saver laun ches automatically if no activity is se nsed within five minutes. However , when a movie or slideshow is playing, the pa nel stops the screen saver from activating. P ress any button to cancel the screen saver . Dismissing the screen saver does not inter f ere when connecting a USB device. Note: P ressing DISPLAY to show the Player status or key guide before the screen saver activates may cause image retention. Important • Do not display th e Player status and key guide for an exte nded period of time while playing a movie or slideshow to avoid poss ible image retention. PRO151FD.book Page 119 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
120 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV Dialog Scre en Message Important • Disp laying pictures in the Home Media Galler y for an extended period may cause an after-image. No. Message Problem 001 Content cannot be played. (001) N o details are available for the error , please check content 100 A communication error occurred. (100) No further details a re availab le for the error 101 No response from ser ver . (101) Flat P anel TV timed out due to delayed ser ver response 102 Disconnected from the network. (102) Cables are disconnected 103 R esponse from ser ver indicatin g that i t is impo ssible to reply . ( 103) Ser ver response is not understandable 300 Content cannot be played. (3 00) No further de tails ar e availabe for the error 301 This format is not supported. (301) An unsupported file is selected 500 F ailed to authenticate. (5 00) F ailed to obtain DRM author ization 501 F ailed to authenticate. (5 01) F ailed to obtain DRM author ization 502 F ailed to authenticate. Check for f ailure of router , hub, other network de vices. (502) F ailed to obtain DRM author ization 503 F ailed to authenticate conten t. The copyright notice of this file might be invalid. (503) F ailed to obtain DRM author ization 504 F ailed to authenticate. (5 04) F ailed to obtain WMDRM author ization 505 F ailed to authenticate. Check for f ailure of router , hub, other network de vices. (505) F ailed to obtain WMDRM author ization 506 F ailed to authenticate. The max count of access devices depend s on ser ver . (506) F ailed to obtain WMDRM author ization 507 F ailed to authenticate. The license of this file might be invalid. Receive the license from a server . (507) F ailed to obtain WMDRM author ization 508 F a iled to authenticate. (508) Au thorization error other than above PRO151FD.book Page 120 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
121 En Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 05 5.12 Add Other Audio Equipment The flat panel TV’s digital audio ou tput terminal (optical ) can output Dolby Digital signals. Using an optica l digital cable, connect an A V receiver to the di gital audio output terminal (o ptical) on the rear of the flat panel TV . This connection al lows audio such as from digital TV broadcasts to play back in high qualit y . If your A V receiver does not have a digital audio input terminal (optical), connect the AUDIO OUT terminals (A UDIO) on the rear of the flat panel TV to the audio input terminal s on the A V receive r . However , this method may result in audio delay between the speakers and the sound from the A V receiver . T o reduce the delay , mute the speakers on the flat panel TV . Nonetheless, you may still experien ce some delay between the sound and the picture. Audio signals synchronized wi th currently displayed images are output to the A UDIO OUT terminals. However , audio accompanying the images are outp ut to the SUB WOOFER OUT terminal. When using the digital audio ou tput termina l (optical), se le ct setting s according to yo ur A V Receiver . For more information, see the operating instructio ns that came with the AV receiver . Note: When signals are input from the HDMI terminals, no signals are output from the DIGIT AL OUT terminal if they are copy guarded. T o set the DIGIT AL OUT te rminal (OPT ICAL) for yo ur A V Receiver , follow the ste ps below . 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup. 2 ) Select Digital Audio Output from the System Setu p menu. 3 ) Select an option from the submenu. 4 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Option Description Dolby Digital outputs in Dolby Digital for the Dolby format and outputs in PCM for the PCM format (default) PCM outputs in the PCM format regardless of signal type T W T W Subwoofer Rea r v ie w This connection is not required when connecting an AV amp equipped with the surround function to a subwoofer. AV c a bl e (commercially available ) Optical digital cable (commercia lly available) A V receiver PRO151FD.book Page 121 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
122 En 05 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV 5.13 Add a Compute r (PC) Use the panel’s PC terminals to conn ect a person al computer . The PC in put terminals are DDC2B -compatible; however , the Plug & Play function may not operate prop erly . When connected to a PC, the panel automatically identifies the input signal type. If the panel fails to see the PC or the picture is unclear , ac tivate the Auto Setu p function. 5.13.1 Automatic Image Position and Clock Adjustments When connected to a PC, the image position and cloc k frequenc y can be adjus ted. The Au to Setup opt ion automa tically adju sts thes e options b ut the im age posit ion and clo ck can be adjusted manually too. This section covers the automatic setup function and th e following sect ion covers how to manually adjust the image position and clock. The A V source device must be connected to the flat panel TV and turned on for these options to work. T o use Auto Setup to automatically adjust the ima ge po sition and clock, follow the steps below . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select Auto Setup from the Option menu. The function begins as soon a s th e selection is made. However , depend ing on the image, the position may not change after an adjust ment. 3 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Note: This function is unavailable when the PC is connected to the HDMI terminal. When Auto Setup finishes, th e message, “ Auto Setu p Comple ted” appears on screen. However , if the setup fails to adjust the image, the message still appears if other factors affect the chan ge. Auto Setup may fail with a PC image composed of similar patter ns or a monochrome pict ure. If Auto Setup fa ils to correct the im age position and clock, ch ange the PC image an d tr y again. 5.13.2 Manual Image Position and Clock Adjustments Usually Auto Setup for a PC is the best practice for adjust ing the image position and cloc k. However , to personally optimize position and clock, follow the steps be low . 1 ) Access the Option through the Setup. 2 ) Select Manual S etup from the Option menu. 3 ) Select an option to adjust. 4 ) Use the up/down arrow buttons ( / ) to adjust the option. Clock and Phase also accept the le f t/right arrows ( / ) for chan ges. 5 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. H/V P osition Adjust Clock : 120 Phase : 15 Reset PRO151FD.book Page 122 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
123 En Helpful Information 06 6 Helpful Inform ation This chapter includes answers to some common questi ons and provides information about software/hardware used in your flat panel TV , cleaning methods, and tr oubleshoo ting/ser vice information. If you need further assistance, ple ase contact us and give us the chance to corre ct any issues you are expe riencing. Thank you again for buying P ioneer! 6.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) This section answers some of the questions received by ou r Support staff members. If your question is not here or you would like more information please see the P ioneer website for more F AQs (www .pioneerelec tronics.com) about your specific model or our flat panel TVs in general. Why won’t the remote control buttons control my flat panel TV? If you select a mode o ther than TV on the remote cont rol, your flat panel TV cann ot receive the commands. P ress the SELECT button to toggle the modes un til the TV indicator lights. Why do I have to move closer to the panel to use the remote control? W eak batteries in the remote control can cause commun icati on to fail. T r y moving closer to the panel and attem pt to control the panel with the remote. If the panel respon ds then change the batterie s . If moving closer h as no effect on the panel, check the surroundi ngs for objects that might be bloc king the signal. Also consider if other equipment that use remote controls have been added to the area around the panel. Objects and other IR signals can disrupt the remote . How can I protect t he remote so it holds up longer? There are se veral ways to p rotect you r remote contro l. Do not leave the remote sittin g in direct sunlight as thi s can warp or deform the case. Avoid spilling liquids on th e remote but if this happens, dr y it i mmediately . If necessar y , remove the batteries and allo w the unit to dr y completely before attempting to use it again. Areas with high humidity can also cause damage. Another issue that can affect the remote control is a leaking batter y . The chemicals from a leaky battery can discolor or damage the re mote. If there is visible leak age in a batter y , remove both batteries immediately and carefully wipe the batter y compartment clean. Re place both batteries with fresh ones. Can the signal from my panel’s remote mess up other audio/video equipment? The flat panel TV emits very weak infrar ed rays from its screen. If there is ot her equipment close by that also uses a remote control such as a DVR or stereo system, it may not rece ive commands from its remote control properly . T r y moving the equipment farther away from the flat panel TV . Note: The strength of infrared rays em itted from the panel differs as the picture changes on the screen. Why does the picture se em to dim when I leave a picture on the screen? When still images (such as photos and com puter images) stay on the screen for an extended pe riod of ti me, the screen slightly dims. This function protects the panel from damage by automatically adjusting the s creen brightness. The screen dims w hen a still imag e is detected for approximately three minutes. How do I find (or change) the Parental Control passwor d if I forgot it? T o clear a forgotten password, from an “E nter P assword” window , press and hold the ENTER button on th e remote control for three or more seconds. Th is action resets the password to the default value of 1234. T o set a new password, refer to “3.5.1 Assign a P arental Control (Block) P asswo rd.” The picture and/or sound on a channel coming through the antenna doesn’t seem as clear as it should be, what can I do? Channels received through an antenna may have a weaker sig nal. T o check si gnal strength, refe r to “Check the Signal Strengt h” in Section 6.4.1 for more i nformation. PRO151FD.book Page 123 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
124 En 06 Helpful Information Why is the picture cropped when I feed a PC si gnal through the PRO-151FD/111FD’s HDMI input? If you select Video for Signal T ype in the HDMI Input menu, the image is over-scanned (e nlarged) but the panel automa tically sw itches to PC when receiving com puter signals. Refer to “5.2.1 Specif y the HDMI Input T ype.” Why won’t my Pioneer flat pane l TV turn on? It may be that your remote has failing batteri es or has been damaged. Check the power cord connection at the wall and on the back of the panel. Also tr y pressing a on you panel. Why does the blue or red power lig ht on my fla t panel TV blink? The panel’s internal protection circuit may have been activate d for so me reason. F irst turn the panel’s a off , wait one (1) or m ore minutes, then turn it ba ck on. If the ligh t still blinks, unplug the power cord from the outlet. Plug in the panel again af ter one to two minutes. If this fails to solve the prob lem, contact your dealer or P ioneer Customer Support (see inside back cover). What can I do to prevent image retention or burn-in? Burn-in or Image R etention is a side effect of plasma technology . Af ter an image remains on the display for an extended time period, when the image chan ges or the unit is turned off , a fain t afterimage or ghost of the original picture may re main. Cont inuing to play vid eo or leaving the uni t turned off for a l ength of time can c lear the afterimage. W e recommend the following s teps and settings to prevent image retention or burn-in. • Set Screen P rotection to On . • Select PC for a signal type when using a PC through an HDMI input. How do I clean my flat panel TV? T o clean the screen surface, gently wipe it with the su ppli ed dr y cloth. R ubbing hard on the screen can scratch the special film coating. Use a clean so ft cloth (cotton or flan nel, for example) for the TV cabinet. F or details on cleaning, refer to “6. 3 Cleaning Methods.” 6.2 Check Your Software/Hardware Version Y ou can check the version of a ll sof tware and hardware used in your fl at panel TV . T o access the version informat ion, follow the dire ctions bel ow . 1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup. 2 ) Select T echnical Info . from the System Setup menu. Software and hardware version s appear . 3 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu af ter checking the versions. 6.3 Cleaning Methods Before cleaning yo ur flat panel TV , un plug the power cord from the outlet. When cleaning the screen or the gl ossy front bezel, gently wipe with a clean, dr y cloth such as the supplied cleaning cloth or a similar type of sof t cloth (e.g., co tton, flannel, etc.). Avoid a wet or damp cloth as th at can let moisture seep into the panel. A dusty or rough-textur ed cloth (or if you rub too hard) can scratch sur faces. Note: Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners on the screen. The chassis o r cabinet of the panel i s mostly composed of plastic. Do not use chemicals such as benzene or paint thinner to clean the cabinet. These ch emicals ca n mar the finish or c ause other deterioration . When cleaning the cabinet, use the same type of cloth and method as described for th e front bezel. Note: Do not affix labels, tapes, etc. to any visible locati on on the flat panel TV . Adhesives can discolor or mar the panel sur faces. PRO151FD.book Page 124 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
125 En Helpful Information 06 6.4 Troubleshooting & Service Information General Issue Possible Solution s No power • Check the co nnection seating at the w all and panel. • See if the panel’s Power On button is turned ON. • Confirm that the remote is set to TV. If the panel indicator lights red, pres s TV ( a ) on the remo te control or STANDBY/ON on the flat panel TV . P o wer suddenly turns off • Confirm that th e Sleep Timer did not turn off your flat panel TV. • Check the power control setting. • See if the panel’s internal temperature has increased. Clean the vents or remove any blocking objects. P anel does not operate • External influences such as vo ltage malfunction, static el ectricity, etc., may cause improper opera tion. Unplug the panel from the wall and leave it for two or more minutes. Recon nect and attempt to operate the panel once again. Rem o t e c o n tr o l do e s not operate • Check if TV power is off. Press th e button when the POWER ON and STANDBY indicators are of f. • Confirm that th e mode is set to TV. • Examine the remote control sensor on the panel for obstructions that could block the signal. • Check that the remot e’s batteries are installed properly and hold a change. Replace wi th new batteries to verify . • Consider chan ges in lighting such as stronge r or new light sources that may af fect the signal. Picture/Sound Issue Possible Solution s No picture and soun d • Check the a ntenna connections. • Reseat the cable connections for other equipment. • Confirm that Parental Control is inactive. • Enter the password to temporarily remove Parental Control (block). • Confirm that the pa nel is set to watch a TV channel instead of an input source. No picture • Check the pict ure adjustment settings. Reset to default values if necessar y . • Confirm that the connec ted equipm ent is install ed and programm ed properly. • If viewing an image from a PC, conf irm that the sign al is compatible. Screen appears dark • C heck for any obstacles in front of the Room Light Sensor. Odd coloring an d shades or misaligned images • Review the room lighting for rece nt changes or different na tural lighting sourc es from windows or do orways. • Check the picture tone and adjust as necessary. Pi c t ur e i s c u t o f f or ru ns off screen • Check the screen size for th e c urrent channel/input source. • Confirm that the posit ion of the picture is centered. PRO151FD.book Page 125 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
126 En 06 Helpful Information P icture but no sou nd • Confirm that the sound is not muted or th at the volume is turned down. • When using a video or PC input sourc e, check that the audio termin als are connected. Sound but no picture • Check if Picture Off is selected from the TOOLS Menu. With this option selected, th e screen is deactivated; only audio is output. T o restore the screen display , press any button other than VOL / – or MUTING . Sound is wrong ( one side only or reversed between lef t and right) • Check if the speaker cable connections have been reversed between the left and right. • Confirm that speaker cables ar e connected and seated properly. • Check the sound balance and adjust if necessary. Brightnes s and co lor tone on the sides differ from the center • If images in 4:3 mode or letterbox images are displayed for long periods or for shorter periods over several days, an afte r-image may remain due to burning. W a tch ima ges in F ull sc reen as m uch as possible to avo id this issue. • Change the Bright ness Sync. setting to Auto . This function adjusts the brightness of the gray side masks for the brightness of the main image. • Use the Screen Protection function (see “3.6.2 Exten d Your Panel Life”). Afte r-image lag • If a bright or stil l image w as on sc reen for a long pe riod befo re switch ing to a darker image the original image may appear as an after-image or ghos t. Try playing a nother bright image, switching the picture quickly many times, or show a very active scene. • Use the Screen Protection function (see “3.6.2 Exten d Your Panel Life”). • Display the Video Pattern screen to help reduce after-image lag. HDMI Control Issue Possible Solutions HDMI Controls do not function • Check the connections between th e panel and the HDMI equipment. • Confirm that the settings for the panel are correct. • Confirm that the equipm ent is HDMI compliant. • Confirm that settings for the equipment are correct. F or details, refer to the operating inst ructions that came with the equipment. Error message: “Th e device cannot be operated. Please check connection” • Check the connections between th e panel and the HDMI equipment. • Confirm that settings for the equipment are correct. F or details, refer to the operating inst ructions that came with the equipment. No picture and sound • Check th e connections between the pa nel and the HDMI equipment. • Confirm that settings for the equipment are correct. F or details, refer to the operating inst ructions that came with the equipment. No picture • C heck the connections betw een the panel and the HDMI equipment. • Confirm that settings for the equipment are correct. F or details, refer to the operating inst ructions that came with the equipment. No sound • Check the connections between the panel and the HDMI equipment. • Confirm that settings for the equipment are correct. F or details, refer to the operating inst ructions that came with the equipment. • Check that the AV system is conne cted to an HDMI terminal and any recorder/player is connected to ano ther HDMI terminal. Picture/Sound Issue Possible Solutions PRO151FD.book Page 126 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
127 En Helpful Information 06 Home Media Gallery/NE TWORK Issue Possible Solution s No ser vers are found No previously connected server(s) found (items in Select Servers are dimme d) “F ailed to acquire a list.” appears on the Ser ver List screen • Confirm th at the PC is On and not in Standby or Sleep (nothing is chosen in Select Servers ). When the PC st arted from “Wake On LAN” (WOL), check if the PC complies with WOL or if the WOL setup is programmed properly in device manager for BIOS or Windows. • Check th e physical connections (hub, rout er, an d cable qu ality). Pl ease use 1 00BASE - TX for best quality playbac k and display speed. • Check the logical connections (IP Address se tup, DHCP, etc.). Co nfirm the IP Address is correct if acq uired by Aut o IP and Fire wall setup. Also check if the IP Address is properly ac quired with DHCP on t he Networ k Setup screen t hat follows the HMG Setup menu. • Using two or more application servers on a single PC may cause unstable operation. For proper operation, it is strongly recommen ded that one application ser ver is used on a single PC. • Check the PC if its media server is running. Restart if nece ssary. Check if one or more servers are On (this may caus e a malfunction). • Check if the PC is operating properly. Reboot the PC after conf irming its specifications and setup values. • Check the media server setup. If a client is registered manually, the setup procedure may have to be run again . An option “Not Allowed” may be selected for connectio ns. • Check if UP nP (Universal Plug and Pla y) is enabled on your ro uter. Refer to your router’s instruction ma nual for procedures. • Wait for a short peri od then select “Upd ate Server List” from the TOOLS Menu. • Check for radio interference when connecte d using a wireless LAN. Radio interference may cause the connection to fail. • If the above does not solv e the problem, try turning TV a off on the remote control u nit then turn a on on the flat panel TV. An available server is selected but cannot be navigated • Check if the server is correct ly set up for file sharing, if the target folder has been deleted, or if one or more folders have been corrupted on the server. • Check if there are too many fi les in each folder. A ser ver is arbitrarily selected • This arbi trary selection happens when the server you used befo re had been set to display the Media Navigator menu screen (i f you reset it, other servers connected are also reset). •W h e n ON is selected for Auto Connectio n on the HMG Setup menu , the server is automatically accessed if only one server is connected. Use the TOOLS Menu to sele ct the proper server. File/f older configuratio n differs from one ser ver to another (strange configurat ion) • The Media Navigator displays the server contents as classified by the server. • If no informa tion (such as ID3 tag) is contained in the file, files cannot be classi fied on the server. A communication error message appears • Refer to the possible solutions provided previously for “No servers are found.” • If the above does not solve the problem, try turning TV a off on the remote control then turn a on on the flat panel TV. PRO151FD.book Page 127 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
128 En 06 Helpful Information Home Media Gallery/PLAYBACK Issue Possible Solutions Image or sound is interrupted or distorted (Block noise appears) • Check the physical con nections (hub, rout er, cable quality). Please use 100BASE-TX for best quality playback and display speed. • Check if the PC is operating properly. Rebo ot the PC after confirming specifications and setup values. • Confirm that the file complies to the supported format, bit rate, and/or profile. Also check the file for damage. • When connected b y a wireless LAN, veri fy that the bit rate is sufficient. • Some files th at comply with the supported format may n ot play back or disp lay. • Check if the DRM content was purchased for use with a nother PC. Your flat panel TV cannot play DRM content if it has been transferred from the PC on which it was purchased to another PC. You can only play DRM content purchased for t he PC in use at the time of purch ase. Please obtain a new license or use the PC f or which the content was purchased. • Check if content on the same server a llows multiple client devices (players). Cannot play o r display • Chec k the physical connection s (hub, router and cable quality). Please use 100BASE- TX for best quality playback an d display speed. • Check if the PC is operating prop erly. Rebo ot the PC a fter confirm ing its sp ecificatio ns and setup. • Check if the file complies to the supported format, bit rate and/o r profile. Also check the file for damage. • Check if the leasing contract for the server has expired. • When connected by a wireless LAN, ch eck if the bit rate is sufficien t. • Some files that comply with the s upported fo rmat may not be played ba ck or displayed. • It takes time to ca pture and display a large-si zed image. If this is the case, no operation may be performed. • Check if the DR M content was purchased for use with another PC . With the flat panel TV you cann ot play DRM content if it has be en transferred from the PC on which it was purchased to another PC. You can only play DRM content purchased for t he PC in use at the time of purch ase. Please obtain a new license or use the PC f or which the content was purchased. • Check if content on the same server is played with multiple cl ient devices (players). Home Medi a Gallery/USB Issue Possible Solutions USB devices are not properly recognized • Check if the device is Mass Storage Class compliant. • Check if it is connected properly, nothing is damaged (power unit, mode suc h as Mass Storage mode and media forma t, etc.). • Check if it contains the supported files. • Check if the speed of the device is suf f icient (poor device speed may result in interrupted or delayed display of images due to a bit-rate problem). When using a digital camera that is not Mass Storage Cla ss compliant, insert the Flash Memory card into the multi-card reader. • Confirm that the device is correctly insert ed or removed. • No USB hub i s supported. When using a home network, co nnect directly to t he device’s USB port. PRO151FD.book Page 128 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
129 En Helpful Information 06 Image or sound is interrupte d or distorted (Block noise appears) • Verify that the file complies with the suppo rted format, bit rate and/or profile. Also check the file for damage. • Some files that compl y with the supported format may not play back or dis play properly. • Check if the device is Mass Storage Class compliant. • Check if it is connected properly, nothing is damaged (power unit, mo de such as Mass Storage mode and medi a format, etc.). • Check if it con tains the supported files. • Check if the speed of the device is su fficient (poor de vice speed may result in interrupted or delay ed displa y of ima ges due to a bit-rat e problem). When u sing a digital camera that is not Mass Storage Clas s compliant, insert the F lash Memo ry card into the multi-card reader. An external dev ice connected to the USB port does not operate • Check if the device is connectable to the flat panel TV. • Re-insert the USB cable. • For connection, use a USB cable shorter than 5 m. • Check if the US B cable is pro perly conn ected. • First turn the pow er off and then on agai n to check if the ex ternal device works correctly. • Check if the external device works corr ectly after the USB device is relaunch ed. • Check if the digital still camera is in viewing mode. • Refer to the instruction manual for the digital still camera. Photo data stored in a digital still camera cannot be re ad through USB inter f ace • Check if the device is connectable to the flat panel TV. • Check if the digital still camera is turned on. • Check if the digital still camera is in viewing mode. Home Media Gallery/Slide Show Issue Possible Solution s Slideshow ( photo content) doesn’t start • Check if the player is in pause, rotation or zoom mode. If it is, press PLAY or ENTER to start the slideshow. Next picture does not appear in the slideshow • The t ime nee ded to disp lay a p ictur e may be longer than the time se t to display in Slide Show settin gs. Reduce the picture size using a PC and tr y again. • Slide Show only displays supported fi les. If there is only one supported file, that file remains on the screen. No other files appear. Other Issue Possible Solution s P anel sounds/noises • Some sounds ar e appropriate for plasma technology. Examples: fan motor noise, el ectrical ci rcuit humming, glass panel buzzing, etc. Brightness on side s of screen are uneven • Display content that completely fills the screen until unevenness is minimized . • Change the AV mode sett ing. Home Media Gallery/USB Issue Possible Solution s PRO151FD.book Page 129 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
130 En 06 Helpful Information If the informatio n abov e fails t o solv e the issue, please contact a Pioneer -a uthorized ser vice representative. Do not attempt to service the panel yourself . Opening or re moving covers exposes you to possible electrical shock and other dangers as well as possibl y voiding your warranty . Request a qualif ied service professional to check you flat panel TV . Some situations that require a ser vice professional are as follows: • panel dropped or damaged • p ower cord or plug damaged • liquid spilled or an object dropped into the panel • exposed to rain or water • noticeable abnormality in panel operation Occasionally a part with in the flat pa nel TV may fail. V erif y that your ser v ice professional uses onl y replacement parts specified by P ioneer or by those with the same ch aracterist ics and per formance a s the original parts. Us e of unauthorized pa rts can result in fire, el ectric shock, or other danger . Upon completion of any ser vice or repair work, request that the ser vice professional per form safety checks to ens ure that the pr oduct is operating properly . If you need more assistance or have a Ser vice/P art s-related question, please con tact the Pi oneer Ser vice organization at (800) 421 -1625. 6.4.1 Check the Signal Strength When the flat panel TV has a UHF/VH F antenna conn ected, the signal may be weak. If th e image or sound is unclear , check the strength of the signal. Fo llow the steps below to ch eck a channel’s signa l strength. 1 ) T une to the channel that is fuzzy or with unclear sound. 2 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup. 3 ) Select Digital T uner Setup from the System Setup menu. 4 ) Select Installation from the Digital T uner Setup menu. 5 ) Select Signal Check from the submenu. 6 ) Select RF Channel . T o add the ch annel(s), select Add. 7 ) Select the channel to be checked. 8 ) Adjust the direction of the ante nna until the current signal strengt h reaches as close to the maximum signal strength as possible. 9 ) P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Add RF Channel : 21 Lev el : 60% Quality : 80% PRO151FD.book Page 130 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
131 En Cautions and Warnings 07 7 Cautions and Warnings Y ou r fl at pa nel TV is des ign ed fo r a l ong and prod uct ive life. T o keep your panel at peak per formance, there are a few things that can help. Th is section provides general information and specific warn ings to help you maintain the flat panel TV at top qu ality throughout its lifetime. Note: If you do not in tend to use your flat panel TV fo r an extended peri od, occasionally power o n and run the panel to maintain function ality . 7.1 Installation D etails It is best to use parts and accessories design ed by Pion eer . Use of accessories other than the Pioneer stand or installation bracket may result in instabil ity and could ca use injur y . F or custom insta llations, please speak with your dealer or expert installer before attemp ting to install your high-end flat panel TV . These professionals are familia r with pro per inst allation techniq ues inc luding v entilatio n. Using the unit without proper ventilation may cause the internal temperature to rise and could result in a po ssible malfunction. When the surrounding environmental or internal temperature exceeds a certain degree , the display automatica lly powers off in o rder to cool the int e rnal electronics and prevent a h azardous situation. A malfunction can be caused by a sin gle issue such as ve ntilation or by a combination of fac tors. Pioneer is not responsible for accidents or damage caused by using parts and/or ac cessories manu factured by other companies, inadequate installation sites, poor stabilization practices , erroneous insta llation methods, operational mistakes, site remodeling, or natural disasters. F or more installation in formation, refer to the following bullet points: • Confirm that panel vents are not part ially o bstructe d or completely blocked. • Use a vacuum cleaner set to its lowest suction setting to clean dusty vents. • Distance the panel from the wall, ot her equipment, etc. (for minimum space requirements , refer to “2.1.1 Check the Location for Suitabili ty ” ). • Do not fit the unit inside of narrow spaces w here ventilation is poor . • Do not drape, seat, or enclose the panel in any material includi ng blankets, loose c l oth, or carpeting as this could block th e panel vents. • Use a proper mount or stand rather than lean ing the pan el against a wall or other supp ort. 7.2 Physical Location & Temperature Considerations Condensation may f orm on the sur face or inside of th e flat pa nel TV w hen the panel is moved from a cold pla ce to a w ar m pl ac e o r ju st af ter a h ea t er or ai r co nd it i on er i s s wi tc h ed on. If co n de ns a ti on fo r ms , d o no t t ur n o n th e flat panel TV until all moisture evap orates. P owering on the display when there is c ondens ation ma y cause the panel to malfunction. 7.3 Usage Guidelines F or maximum enjoyment of your P ioneer flat pane l TV , read the following information carefully . Over the course of the flat panel TV ’s lifetime, as with all phosphor-based screens including standard tu be-type TVs, the luminosity of the screen diminishes very slowly . Also, static pictures shown over an ext ended period can adversely affect the screen image. T o enjoy bright and beautiful pictures for many years to come, please apply the following guidelines. • Set the flat panel TV to Stan dby wh en it is not bei ng used. • Avoid leaving a still image or frequently showing th e same picture on the scre en (e.g . closed-captioned images, games with static portions, etc.). • Hide the On Screen Display (OSD) from a DVD pl ayer , VCR, or other device when not in use. • Do not leave a picture freeze-fram ed or paused for long periods. • Avoid showing a picture with ver y bright and ver y da rk areas on the screen for extended lengths to time. • Activate the GAME mode on the A V Selection submen u to play a game but tr y to limit using this mod e for more than two hours at a time. PRO151FD.book Page 131 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
132 En 07 Cautions and Warnings • View full-mo tion, high-action vid eo in WIDE or FULL s cr een after playing a game or showing a still/PC image. The recommended duration for showing the action video is three times as long as the game or PC image was on the screen . • View full-motion video in WIDE or FULL screen af ter pl aying conten t with side, top, or bottom masking (b lack bars). Extensive viewing of masked content without t his recover y proc ess can cause uneven wear on the plasma cells. 7.4 Signal Interference or Noise Signal inter ference, also referred to as video noise or white no ise , can be caused by many dif ferent situations. The most common are addressed in the following sections. Infrared rays The flat panel TV releases infrared rays because of its ch aracteristics. Depending on ho w the flat panel TV is used, remote controls for nearby equipment may be adversely affected. Wirele ss headphones using inf rared rays can experience noise interference. If this is the case, move equipment to a location where its rem ote control sensor is not affected. Radio Signals While this flat panel TV meets the required specifications, it can af fect the signals for surrounding equipment. If your radio, PC, VCR , or other electri cal equipment is disrupted by the panel, move the equipment away from the panel. Flat Panel TV Motor The screen of the flat panel TV is co mposed of extremely fine pixels that emit light according to received video signals. This principle may ca use you to hear a slight bu zz or electrical hum coming from the panel. This is a normal sound for the flat panel TV an d does not indicate a failing unit. Flat Panel TV Fans Y ou may hear the sound of a fan mot or at times. The slight noise is caus ed by a cooling fan motor speeding up when the ambient temperature of the flat panel TV rises. This is a normal function of th e panel and is not a malfunction . 7.5 Phosphor Properties The following are typical effects and characteristics of a phosphor-base d matrix display and as such are not covered by the W arranty : • Permanent residual images up on the phosphors of the panel • Existence of one or more inacti ve light cells in small quantity • Noises generated by fan motors, electri cal circuits (h um), panel plates, etc. 7.6 Image Information Includ ing Retention & After-Image Lag Menu Window Size (after a Video Switch) P rograms may be high definition (HD) or standard definit i on (SD). Th is flat panel TV au tomatically scales to the appropriate definition type. If the video program’s defini tion type changes while a menu window is on screen (for example: HD to SD or SD to HD) th e menu size may temporarily shrink or e nlarge until the panel finishes adjusting the pictur e. Adjusting may happen , for ex ample, when switch ing between a TV prog ram and playback from a DVR , or when a recorded program switches betwee n different definition types whi le the m enu is showin g. The menu returns to its normal size after a couple of seconds. This action is normal and does n ot indicate a problem with y our flat panel TV . Pixel Information Plasma screens show picture using pix els. P ioneer flat panel TVs contain a ve r y large number of pixe ls. The size of the panel determines the number of pixels. With the EL ITE Series models, there are over 6.2 million pixels in the 50”/60” panel. All P ioneer displa y panels are manufacture d using a ver y high level of ultra-preci sion technology and undergo indivi dual quality control. PRO151FD.book Page 132 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
133 En Cautions and Warnings 07 In rare cases, some pixels can be pe rmane ntly swit ched off , or o n, result ing in either a black or colored pixel permanently fixed on the screen. Thi s effect is common to all plasma displays because it is a consequence of the technology . If the defective pixels are visibl e at the standard viewing distance of between 2.5 and 3. 5 meters (8.2 feet and 11.5 feet) while viewing a normal broadcast (i.e. not a te st card, still image, or single color display) please immediately contact P ioneer Customer Support (USA) or Customer Sati sfaction (CANADA). See inside b ack cover for contact information. If , however , the faulty pixels can only be seen close up or during single color displays then this is considered normal for this technology . Image Retention (a.k.a. Burn-In) Leaving a static picture on screen for several hours can caus e a faint imprint of the image. This imprint is known as image retention or burn-in . The image may be temporar y or permanent. Althou gh caused by different things, image retention can occur on all disp lay technologies including LDC, plasma, direct view CR T TVs, and projection TVs. On today’s plasma displays, permanent i mage retention is less of a worry . Most image retention can be improved simply by watching somethin g with a lot of action or rapid screen ch anges. T o avoid image retention as much as possible, refer to the gui delines below . • Change the picture periodically when showing static images, such as a fi xed image from a PC or a TV ga me unit, for longer periods. • Avoid leaving fixed images such as time of day indi cator or channel logos on screen whenever possible. • Display content in a wide aspect ratio (no bl ack or gray bars on any side of the cont ent). This flat panel TV is equipped with multiple wide-screen viewing modes; use on e of these modes to fill the entire screen with content. View in a wide aspect ratio unless do ing so would be a copyright infrin gement. • Set the Side Mask detection functi on to Mode 1 or Mode 2. High Definition 1 6:9 aspect ratio images containing side masks are detected automatically and si de masks are added or the image appears in ful l- screen. • Avoid showing dark images after still images for a peri od of time. In most cases, any image retention caused by this sequence can be corrected by displa ying bright images for a similar period of time. After-Image La g Displaying the same images such as still images for a long time may caus e afte r-image laggin g. Af ter-Image Lag refers to a ghost of the still image re maining visible after the picture is no longer being shown. This may occur in the following cases. • Af ter-image lagging due to remaining electric load If an image with very high peak luminance is disp layed for more than a minute, after-image lagging may occur due to the remainin g electric load. The ghos t-i mage remaining on the screen disappears when moving images are shown . The luminance of the stil l image and the length of time it was displayed determine how long it takes for the ghost image to fade away . • Af ter-ima ge (lag image) due to burning Avoid displaying the same image on the flat panel TV co ntinuously over a long peri od. If the same image is displayed continuously for several ho urs, or for shorter periods over se veral days, a permanent af ter-image may remain on the screen. This af ter-image is permanent be cause the fluoresc ent materials burned. Burned images may fade eventually after playing other video sequences but do not disappear complete ly . When a program menu, or frozen image is displayed for up to 10 minutes, th e flat panel TV au tomatically turns the image off to prevent the screen from being burned. Screen Protec tion Screen P rotection simultaneously opti mizes the related settings to alleviate image retention. F or details, see “3.6.2 Extend Y our P anel Life.” Image Orbiter Another built-in feature to protect ag ainst burn-in is t he Orbiter function. Orbiter automatically changes the position of the picture imperceptibly while the image is on screen. F or more informat ion about the feature, refer to “3.6.3 T urn On the Image Orbiter .” PRO151FD.book Page 133 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
134 En 07 Cautions and Warnings 7.7 Safety Precautions Y our flat panel TV is engineered an d manufactured wi th one of the highest priorities bei ng safety . However , improper use can result in electric shock and/or fire. T o avoid dan ger plea se follow the instru ctions b elow wh en installing, operating, and c leaning your flat panel TV . • Read & Retain Instructions – R ead all operating and user information pr ovided with your flat panel TV . • Environment – Avoid installing the panel in a location wi th exposure to large quantities of dust, temperature extremes, high humidity , direct sunlig ht, or subject to excessi ve vibrations or impact shock. Also , never pour a liquid or insert an object in to the flat pa nel TV . • Cleaning – See the section above regarding th e proper way to cl ean your flat panel TV . • W a ter & Mois ture – Avoid operating or positio ning you r panel close to water or othe r sources of liquid. Such locations include a bathroom, a kitche n or laundr y si nk, in a damp basement, by a swimming pool, etc. • P ower – T urn OFF the panel be fore connecting any ot he r equipment. Operate the pa nel only from a grounded outlet. 7.8 Legal Notices 7.8.1 Safety WARNING This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or shock hazard, do no t place any container fil led with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or fl owe r pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_B_En WARNING: This product equipped with a three-wire grounding (earthed) plug - a plug that has a third (grounding) pin. This plug only fits a gro unding-type power outlet. If you are unable to insert the plug into an ou tlet, contact a licensed electri cian to replace the outlet with a properly grounded one. Do not defeat the safety pur pose of the grounding plug. D3-4-2-1-6_A_En WARNING: To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2 -1-7a_A_En VENTILATION CAUTION: When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventila tion to improve heat radiation. For the minimum space required, see page 15. WARNING: Slots and openings in the cabinet are pr ov ided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and t o protect it from overheating. To prevent fire hazar d, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. PRO151FD.book Page 134 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
135 En Cautions and Warnings 07 7.8.2 Radio Interference CAUTION: The  switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. S ince the power cord serves as the main disconnect de vice for the unit, you will need to unpl ug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make su re the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an ac cident. To avoid fire haza rd, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when lef t unused for a long period of ti me (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_E n Operating E nvironment Operating en vironment tem perature and hu midity: 0 ºC to 40 ºC ( 32 ºF to 104 ºF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ve ntilated area, or in loc ations exposed to high humidity or di rect sunlight (or strong artificia l light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_E n This digital television is capable of receiving analog basic, digital basic and digital premium cable television programming by direct connection to a cable system providin g such progra mming. A security ca rd provided by your cable operator is required to view encrypte d digital programming. Certai n ad vanced and interactiv e digital cable services such as vi deo-o n-demand, a cable o perator’s enhanced program guide and data- enhanced television services may requi re the use of a se t-top box. For more information call your local cable operator. Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out with out appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s right to operate t he equip ment. D8-10-2_En [For Canadian model] This Class B di gital apparatus co mplies with Cana dian IC ES-003. D8-10-1-3_En FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION DECLARATION OF C ONFORMITY This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is sub ject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, a nd (2) this device mu st accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Product Name: Flat Panel TV Model Number: PRO-151FD/PRO-111FD Product Category: Class B Personal Computers & Peripherals Responsible Party Name: PIONEE R ELECTRONICS SERVIC E, INC. Address: 1925 E. DOMINGUEZ ST., LO NG BEACH, CA 90801-176 0, U.S.A. Phone: 800-421-1625 URL: http://ww w.pioneere lectronics .com NOTE: This equ ipment ha s been test ed and fou nd to compl y with the lim its for a Class B digital de vice, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reas onable protection against harmful interference in a residentia l installation. This equipment gene rates, uses, an d can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this e quipment does cause harmful interference to radi o or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off an d on, the user is encoura ged to try to correct the interferen ce by one or more of the fol lowing me asures: – Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is conne cted. – Consult the dealer or an experien ced radio/TV technicia n for help. D8-10-1-2_En CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regula tions when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. To prev ent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections. D8-10-3a_En PRO151FD.book Page 135 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
136 En 08 Appendix 8 Appendix 8.1 Ratings Charts (for Vari ous Audience Classifications) The charts below list the various rating systems recognized by your flat panel TV . 8.1.1 TV Ratings (age-based) 8.1.2 U.S. TV Parental Guideline Ratings (a ge/category-based) 8.1.3 MPAA Movi e Ratings (age-base d) Rating Description TV - Y All children TV -Y7 Children seven and above TV -G General audiences TV -PG P arental guidance suggested TV -14 P arents strongly caut ioned TV -MA Mature audiences only Rating Description FV F antasy V iolence VV i o l e n c e S Sexual Situations L Adult Language D Sexual Dialog Rating Description N/A Not applicable for MP AA ratings G General audiences. All ages admitted. PG P arental guidan ce suggested. Some material may not be suitable for childre n. PG-13 P arents strongly cautioned. Some material may be inappropriate for children unde r 13. R Restricted. Under 17 requires accompanying parent or adult guardian (age varies in some jurisdicti ons). NC -17 No one 17 and under admitted. NR Not rated PRO151FD.book Page 136 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
137 En 08 Appendix 8.1.4 Canad ian - English Ratings (age-based) 8.1.5 Canad ian - French Ratings (age-based) Rating Description E (exempt) News, sports, documentaries, other information programming, talk sh ows, music videos, variety programming C (children) F or younger ch ildren u nder the a ge of eig ht years; pays clo se atte ntion to themes that could threaten their sense of security and well-being C8 (children over 8) Contains no portraya l of vi olence as the preferred, acceptab le, or only way to resolv e conflic t; nor encourages children to imitate dangerous acts they may see o n the screen G (general) Acceptable for all age groups; cont ains ver y little violence, physical, ve rbal or emotional PG (parental guid ance) F or g eneral audi ence but ma y not be suit able for younger children (under the age of eight); could contain controvers ial themes or issues 14 (children over 14) Contains themes where violence is one of the dominant element s of the st or yline but it must be integral to the development of plot or character; language usage could be profa ne; limited nudity presen t within t he cont ext of t he theme 18 (adults) Contains depict ions of violence related t o the development of plot, character or themes intended for ad ult viewing; could co ntain graphic language and portraya ls of sex and nudity Rating Description E N ews, sports, documentaries, other information programming, talk sh ows, music videos, variety programming G A ll ages and children, contains minimal direct violence, but may be integrated into the plot in a humorous or unrea listic manner 8ans General but inadvisabl e for young children; may be viewed by a wide public audienc e but could contain scenes di sturbing to children und er eight who canno t distinguish between ima ginar y an d real situations; view with parent 13ans Contains scenes of fr equent violent scenes and therefore recommended for viewing wi th parent 16ans Contains frequent vi olent scenes and intense violence 18ans Only for adult viewing; contains frequent violent scenes and extreme violence PRO151FD.book Page 137 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
138 En 08 Appendix 8.2 Manufacturer Codes to Pr ogram into the Remote Control 8.2.1 Cable 8.2.2 Satellite Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code A-Mark 0008,0144 ABC 0237, 0003, 0008 Accuphase 0003 Acorn 0237 Action 0237 Active 0237 Americast 0899 Archer 0237, 0260 BCC 0276 Bell South 0899 British T elecom 0003 Centur y 0008 Clearmaster 0883 ClearMax 0883 Cool Box 0883 Coolmax 0883 Digeo 1187 Director 0476 Fo s g a t e 0276 GE 0144 General Instrument 0476, 0810, 0276, 0003 Gibralter 0003 GMI 0883 GoldSta r 0144 Hitachi 0003, 0008 Insight 0476, 0810 Jerrold 0476, 0810, 0276, 0003 Memorex 0000 Mitsubishi 0003 Motorola 1376, 0476, 0810, 0276, 1187, 1106 Multitech 0883 Nova Vision 0008 Novaplex 0008 Pa c e 1877, 0877, 0237, 0008 P anasonic 0000, 0008, 0144, 0107 Pa r a g o n 0000, 0008, 0525 P enney 0000 Philips 1305, 0317 Pioneer 1877, 0877, 0144, 0533, 0023, 0260, 1021 Pu l s a r 0000 Quasar 0000 Rad i oS h a ck 0883 RCA 1256 Rega l 0276 Runco 0000 Samsung 0003, 0144, 0023 Scientific Atlanta 1877, 0877, 0477, 0237, 0003, 0000, 0008 Sony 1006 Sprucer 0144 Starcom 0003 Supercable 0276 Supermax 0883 Thomson 1256 To r x 0003 To s h i b a 0000 Tr i s t a r 0883 United Cable 0276, 0003 US Electronics 0276, 0003, 0008 V2 0883 Vi de o w a y 0000 Viewmaster 0883 Vi si o n 0883 V ortex View 0883 Zenith 0000, 0525, 0899 Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Bell Express V u 0775, 1170 Chaparral 0216 Coolsat 1806, 2147 Crossdigital 1109 DirecTV 1377, 0392,0566, 0639, 1639, 1142, 0247, 0749, 1749, 0819, 1856, 1076, 1108, 0099, 1109, 1392, 1414, 1442, 1443, 1444, 1538, 1609 Dish Network System 1505, 0775, 1170, 1775 Dishpro 1505, 0775, 1775 Echostar 1505, 0775, 1170, 1775 Expressvu 0775, 1775 Fo r t e c St ar 1550, 1821, 1948 F unai 1377 GE 0392, 0566 General Instrument 0869 GOI 0775, 1775 Hitachi 0749, 0819, 1250 Houston 0775 HTS 0775, 1775 Hughes Network Systems 1142, 0749, 1749, 1442, 1443, 1444, 1538 Humax 1790, 1781 Innova 0099 Jerrold 0869 JVC 0775, 1170, 1775 LG 1226, 1414 Magnavox 0722 McIntosh 0869 Mitsubishi 0749 Motorola 0869, 0856 Netsat 0099 Next Level 0869 P anasonic 0247, 0701 Pa n s a t 0647, 1807 Philips 1142, 0749, 1749, 0775, 0819, 1076, 0722, 0099, 1442 Pioneer 1142, 0329, 1442 Pr i m e st a r 0869 Pr o s c an 0392, 0566 Rad io Sha c k 0566, 0775, 0869 RCA 0392, 0566, 1142, 0775, 0855, 0143, 1392, 1442 Samsung 1377, 1142, 1276, 1108, 1109, 1442, 1609 Sanyo 1219 SKY 0856, 0099 Sony 0639, 1639 Star Choice 0869 Star T rak 0869 Thomson 0392, 0566 TiVo 1142, 1442, 1443, 1444, 1538 To s h i b a 0749, 1749, 0790, 0819, 1285 UltimateTV 1392 Ultrasat 1806 Uniden 0722 Vo o m 0869 Zenith 0856, 1856, 1810 PRO151FD.book Page 138 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
139 En 08 Appendix 8.2.3 VCR (Brands A - F) Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code A-Mark 0037, 0240, 0000, 0278, 0046 ABS 1972 Accurian 0000 Admiral 0060, 0048, 0039, 0047, 0104, 0209, 0479 Adventura 0037, 0240, 0000 Adyson 0072 Aiko 0278 Aiwa 0037, 0000, 0124, 0307, 1137, 0468 Akai 0041, 0175 Alba 0209, 0072, 0278 Alienware 1972 Allegro 0039, 1137 America Action 0278 American High 0035, 0081 Amstrad 0000 Anam Nationa l 0226 Asha 0240 Astra 0035, 0240 Audio Dynamics 0040 Audio- T echnica 0058 Audiovox 0037, 0278, 0038 Avis 0000, 0072 Beaumark 0240 Bell & Howell 0035, 0048, 0039, 0000, 0104, 0046, 0479 Bell ExpressV u 1944 Broksonic 0184, 0121, 0209, 0002, 0479, 1815 Calix 0037 Candle 0037, 0038 Canon 0035 Capehart 0002 Captive W orks 2167 Carrera 0240 Car ver 0035, 0081 CCE 0072, 0278 Cineral 0278 CineVision 1137 Citizen 0035, 0037, 0240, 0000, 0209, 0278, 0479 Classic 0037 Colortyme 0060, 0035, 0045, 0278 Colt 0000, 0072 Craig 0037, 0047, 0240, 0072 Criterion 0000, 0072 Crosley 0035, 0081, 0000 Crown 0072, 0278 Curtis Mathes 0060, 0035, 0162, 0240, 0000, 0041, 0278, 0432 Cybernex 0240 CyberP ower 1972 Daewoo 0037, 0045, 0278, 0046, 1137 Daytron 0037, 0278 DBX 0040, 0050 Dell 1972 Denon 0081, 0042 Derw ent 0041 DirecTV 0739, 0740 Dish Network System 1944 Dishpro 1944 Dual 0000 Dumont 0040 Durabrand 0039, 0038 Dynatech 0240, 0000 Echostar 1944 Electrohome 0060, 0037, 0240, 0000, 0043, 0209 Electrophonic 0037 Emerald 0184, 0121 Emerex 0032 Emerson 0037, 0184, 0240, 0000, 0121, 0043, 0209, 0002, 0278, 0479, 0593, 1593 ESA 1137 Expressvu 1944 Fis h e r 0039, 0047, 0000, 0104, 0046 Fu j i 0035, 0033 Fu j i t s u 0000 F unai 0037, 0000, 0072, 0278, 0593, 1593 PRO151FD.book Page 139 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
140 En 08 Appendix 8.2.4 VCR (Brands G - O) Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Garrard 0000 Gateway 1972 GE 0060, 0035, 0048, 0240, 0000 Gemini 0060 Genexxa 0037, 0000, 0278 Go V ideo 0240, 0432, 0526, 0614, 1137, 1873 GOI 1944 GoldStar 0035, 0037, 0039, 0000, 0278, 0038, 1137 Goodmans 0037, 0081, 0000, 0072, 0278 Gradiente 0000 Granada 0081, 0042 Grundig 0081, 0226 Harley Davidson 0000 Harman/Kardon 0081, 0038 Har vard 0072 Har wood 0072 Headquarter 0046 Hewlett Pa c k a r d 1972 HI-Q 0035, 0047, 0000 Hitachi 0035, 0037, 0045, 0000, 0042, 0041, 0089 Howard Computers 1972 HP 1972 HTS 1944 Hughes Network Systems 0042, 0739, 0740 Humax 0739, 1797, 1988 Hush 1972 Hytek 0047, 0000, 0072 iBUYPOWER 1972 Instant Replay 0035, 0226 IT T Nokia 0240, 0041 Janeil 0240 Jensen 0067, 0041 JVC 0067, 0041, 0058, 1162 1944 KEC 0037, 0278 Kenwood 0067, 0041, 0038, 0046 KLH 0072 Kod a k 0035, 0037 KTV 0000 LG 0037, 0240, 0038, 1037, 1137, 2010 Linksys 1972 Lloyd’s 0240, 0000, 0072, 0038, 0040 Loewe 0081 Logik 0240, 0000, 0072 Lumatron 0278 Luxor 0046 LXI 0037, 0000, 0042, 0067 M Electronic 0240 Magnasonic 0037, 0240, 0000, 0072, 0278, 0593 Magnavox 0035, 0037, 0048, 0039, 0081, 0240, 0000, 0226, 0563, 0593, 0618, 1593 Magnin 0240 Marantz 0035, 0081, 0038 Marta 0037 Matsui 0037, 0209 Matsushita 0035, 0162, 0081, 1162 Media Center PC 1972 MEI 0035 Memorex 0035, 0162, 0037, 0048, 0039, 0047, 0240, 0000, 0104, 0209, 0072, 0278, 0046, 0307, 0479, 1037, 1162 Metz 0037 MGA 0060, 0240, 0043 MGN T e chnology 0240 Microsoft 1972 Midland 0240 Mind 1972 Minolta 0042 Mitsubishi 0060, 0048, 0047, 0000, 0042, 0067, 0043, 0041, 0173 Motorola 0035, 0048, 1843 Movie W alker 0072 MTC 0240, 0000, 0072 MTX 0000 Multitech 0039, 0000, 0072 NAD 0240, 0104, 0058 NEC 0104, 0067, 0041, 0038, 0040, 0050 New T ech 0072 Nikko 0037, 0278 Nikkodo 0037, 0278 Nishi 0240 Niveus Med ia 1972 Noblex 0240 Northgate 1972 Olympus 0035, 0162, 0104, 0226 Onkyo 0222 Optimus 1062, 0035, 0162, 0037, 0048, 0047, 0240, 0000, 0104, 0058, 0432, 0593, 1162 Orion 0184, 0240, 0000, 0104, 0121, 0209, 0002, 0278, 0479 PRO151FD.book Page 140 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
141 En 08 Appendix 8.2.5 VCR (Brands P - V) 8.2.6 VCR (Brands W - Z) Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Pa n a m a 0035 P anasonic 1062, 0035, 0162, 0000, 0225, 0226, 0614, 0616, 1162 P enney 0035, 0162, 0037, 0047, 0081, 0240, 0000, 0042, 0067, 0038, 0040 Pe n t a x 0042 Philco 0035, 0081, 0000, 0209, 0479 Philips 0035, 0162, 0048, 0081, 0045, 0000, 0209, 0616, 0618, 0739, 1081, 1181, 1818 Pi l o t 0037 Pioneer 0162, 0081, 0042, 0067, 0058, 0168, 1337, 1803 Po l k A u d i o 0081 P ortland 0278 P residian 1593 P rofitronic 0240 P roscan 0060 Pr o t e c 0000, 0072 Pr o t e ch 0072 Pu l s a r 0039, 0240, 0278 Pu l s e r 0240 Quarter 0046 Quartz 0035, 0047, 0046 Quasar 0035, 0162, 0002, 0226, 1162 Rad i oS h a ck 0035, 0162, 0037, 0048, 0047, 0240, 0000, 0104, 0046, 1037, 1162 Rad i x 0037 Ran d ex 0037 RCA 0060, 0035, 0048, 0240, 0045, 0000, 0042, 0880, 0058 Rea l i st i c 0035, 0162, 0037, 0048, 0047, 0240, 0000, 0104, 0121, 0278, 0046, 1162 Rep la yT V 0614, 0616 Ricavision 1972 Rio 1137 Runco 0039 Samsung 0060, 0240, 0045, 0000, 0038, 0432, 0739 Samtron 0240 Sanky 0048, 0039 Sansui 0240, 0000, 0067, 0209, 0041, 0072, 0002, 0479 Sanyo 0047, 0240, 0000, 0104, 0046, 0159, 0479 Scott 0184, 0045, 0121, 0043 Sears 0060, 0035, 0162, 0037, 0048, 0039, 0047, 0033, 0045, 0000, 0042, 0104, 0067, 0043, 0209, 0041, 0072, 0046, 0058 Sharp 0048, 0047, 0032, 0000, 1875 Shintom 0039, 0240, 0000, 0072 Shogun 0240 Siemens 0037, 0104 Signature 0060, 0035, 0037, 0048, 0000, 0046, 0479 Singer 0037, 0240, 0072 Sonic Blue 0614, 0616, 1137 Sonographe 0046 Sony 0035, 0047, 0032, 0033, 0000, 0067, 0046, 0226, 0275, 0636, 1032, 1702, 1703, 1896, 1972 Soundmaster 0000 Stack 9 1972 Star Choice 1843 STS 0042 SV2000 0000, 0072 SV A 0000 Sylvania 0035, 0081, 0000, 0043, 0593, 1593 Symphonic 0240, 0000, 0002, 0593, 1593 Systemax 1972 Ta g a r S y s t e m s 1972 Ta n d y 0000, 0104 Ta s h i k o 0037 T atung 0048, 0081, 0000, 0067, 0041 Te a c 0000, 0067, 0041 T echnics 0035, 0162, 0037, 0000 Te k n i k a 0035, 0037, 0000 Te l e c o r d e r 0240 T elefunken 0041 Te v i o n 0479 Thomas 0000, 0002 Thomson 0060, 0041 Tis on ic 0278 TiVo 0618, 0636, 0739, 0740, 1337, 1944, 1996 TMK 0240, 0000 TNIX 0037 To c o m 0240 To s h i b a 0240, 0045, 0000, 0043, 0209, 0041, 1008, 1972, 1996, 1988 To s o n i c 0278 To t e v i s i o n 0037, 0240 To u c h 1972 Tr i x 0037 Ultra 0045, 0278 Unitech 0240 Ve c t o r 0045 V ector Research 0184, 0038, 0040 Ve x t r a 0072 Vic t or 0067, 0041 Vid eo C on c ep t s 0045, 0040 Vid eo m ag i c 0037 Vid eo s on i c 0240, 0000, 0072 Vie w so ni c 1972 Vil l ai n 0000 V oodoo 1972 Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Wa r d s 0060, 0035, 0037, 0048, 0047, 0081, 0033, 0240, 0045, 0000, 0042, 0043, 0041, 0072, 0038, 0046, 0058, 0479 Whar fedale 0593 White We s t i n g h o u s e 0000, 0209, 0072, 0278, 0479 Wo r l d 0209, 0002, 0479 XR -1000 0035, 0240, 0000, 0072 Ya m a h a 0041, 0038 Zenith 0037, 0039, 0033, 0000, 0209, 0041, 0278, 0479, 1137, 1709 ZT Group 1972 PRO151FD.book Page 141 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
142 En 08 Appendix 8.2.7 PVR 8.2.8 B D (HD-DVD) 8.2.9 DVD-R Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code ABS 1972 Alienware 1972 Bell Express V u 1944 Captive W orks 2167 CyberP ower 1972 Dell 1972 DirecTV 0739, 0740 Dish Network System 1944 Dish P ro 1944 Echostar 1944 Expressvu 1944 Gateway 1972 Go Video 0614, 1873 GOI 1944 Hewlett P ackard 1972 Howard Computers 1972 HP 1972 HTS 1944 Hughes Network Systems 0739, 0740 Humax 0739, 1797 1988 Hush 1972 iBUYPOWER 1972 JVC 1944 LG 2010 Linksys 1972 Media Center PC 1972 Microsoft 1972 Mind 1972 Motorola 1843 Niveus Media 1972 Northgate 1972 P anasonic 0614, 0616 Philips 0618, 0739 1818 Pioneer 1337, 1803 RCA 0880 Rep la yT V 0614, 0616 Samsung 0739 Sharp 1875 Sonic Blue 0614, 0616 Sony 0636, 1972 Stack 9 1972 Star Choice 1843 Systemax 1972 Ta g a r S y s t e m s 1972 TiVo 0618, 0636, 0739, 1337 0740 To s h i b a 1008, 1972, 1996, 1988 To u c h 1972 Vi ew s o n i c 1972 V oodoo 1972 Zenith 1709 ZT Group 1972 Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code LG 0741 Onkyo 1769 P anasonic 1641 Philips 2084 Pioneer 2052, 0142 RCA 1769 Samsung 0199 Sony 1516 To s h i b a 1769 Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Accurian 0675, 1416 Apex Digital 1056 Aspire Digital 1168 Astar 1489 Broksonic 1419 Citizen 2116 Coby 1086 CyberHome 1129, 1502 Digital Max 1738 Electrohome 2116 F unai 0675, 1334 Gateway 1073, 1158 Go Video 0741, 1158, 1304, 1730 iLo 1348 JVC 1275 LG 0741 LiteOn 1158, 1416, 1440, 1738 Magnavox 0646, 0675, 1506 P anasonic 0490 Philips 0646, 1340 Pioneer 0631, 1460, 1475, 1476, 1512 P olaroid 1086, 2130 Pr e s i di a n 1738 RCA 0522 Samsung 0490, 1470 Sensor y Science 1158 Sharp 0675 Sony 1033, 1070, 1431 Sylvania 0675 To s h i b a 1510, 1588 Zenith 0741 PRO151FD.book Page 142 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
143 En 08 Appendix 8.2.10 DVD (Brands A - N ) Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code 3D LAB 0503, 0539 Accurian 0675, 1072, 1416, 1737 Acoustic Solutions 0730 Adcom 1094 Afreey 0698 Aiwa 0641 Akai 0695, 0705, 0770, 1089 Alba 0672, 0717 Alco 0790 Allegro 0869 Amphion Media Wo r k s 0872, 1245 AMW 0872, 1245 Apex Digital 0533, 0672, 0717, 0755, 0794, 0795, 0796, 0797, 1004, 1020, 1056, 1061 Arrgo 1023 Aspire Digital 1168, 1407 Astar 1489, 1678, 1679 Audiovox 0717, 0790, 1041, 1072, 1121, 1122 Awa 0730 Axion 1072 B & K 0655, 0662 BBK 1224 Bel Canto Design 1571 Blaupunkt 0717 Blue P arade 0571 Blue Sky 0695, 0699 Bose 2023 Brandt 0651 Broksonic 0695, 1419 California Audio Labs 0490 CA VS 1057 Celestial 1020 Centrex 0672, 1004 Cinea 0831 Cinego 1399 CineVision 0876, 0833, 0869 Citizen 1003, 0695, 1277, 1587, 2116 Clairtone 0571 Coby 0778, 0852, 1077, 1086, 1107, 1165, 1177, 1351, 1628 Craig 0831 Creative 0503, 0539 Curtis Mathes 1087 CyberHome 0816, 0874, 1023, 1024, 1117, 1129, 1502, 1537 Cytron 0705 D-Link 1881 Daewoo 0784, 0705, 0770, 0833, 0869, 1169, 1172, 1234, 1242, 1441 Dansai 0770 Daytek 0872 Decca 0770 Denon 0490, 0634 Denver 0778 Desay 1407 Diamond V ision 1316 DigitalMax 1738 Digitrex 0672 Disney 0675, 1270 DiViDo 0705 Dual 0675, 1068, 1085 Durabrand 1127, 2164 DVD2000 0521 Electrohome 1003, 2116 Emerson 0591, 0675, 1268 Enterprise 0591 Entivo 0503, 0539 Enzer 0770 ESA 1268 Firs t li ne 0651 Fis h e r 0670 F unai 0675, 1268, 1334 Gateway 1073, 1077, 1158 GE 0522, 0815, 0717 Go Video 0573, 0744, 0717, 1730, 1304, 1158, 1144, 1099, 1075, 1044, 0869, 0833, 0783, 0741, 0715 Go Vis ion 1072 GoldStar 0741, 0869 Goodmans 0790 GPX 0699, 0769 Gradiente 0490, 0651 Greenhill 0717 Grundig 0539, 0705 Harman/Kardon 0582, 0702 Helios 2080 Hello Kitty 0831 Hitachi 0573, 0664, 1247, 1664 Hiteker 0672 Humax 1588, 1500 iLo 1348, 1472 Initial 0717, 1472 Insignia 1268, 2095, 2150 Integra 0571, 0627 IRT 0783 Jaton 1078 JBL 0702 JMB 0695 JSI 1423 JVC 0558, 0623, 0867, 1275, 1550, 1602 jWi n 1049, 1051 Kawasaki 0790 Kenwood 0490, 0534, 0682, 0737 KLH 0717, 0790, 1020, 1149 Kloss 0533 Kon ka 0711, 0721 Kos s 0651, 0769, 0896, 1061, 1423 Landel 0826 Lasonic 0627, 0798, 1173 Lecson 1533 Lenoxx 1127 LG 0591, 0741, 0869 LiteOn 1058, 1158, 1416, 1440, 1656, 1738 Loewe 0511, 0741 Logix 0783 Magnasonic 0651, 0675 Magnavox 0503, 0539, 0646, 0675, 1268, 1354, 1472, 1506 Malata 0782, 1159 Marantz 0503, 0539, 0675 Mclntosh 1533, 1273 Medion 0651 McIntosh Memorex 0695, 0831, 1270 Microsoft 0522, 1708, 2083 Minato 0752 Mintek 0839, 0717, 1472 Mitsubishi 1521, 0521 Momitsu 1082 Mustek 0730 Myr yad 0894 NAD 0692, 0741 Naiko 0770 Nakamichi 1222 NEC 0785, 0869 Nesa 0717 Next Base 0826 NexxT ech 1402 Nintaus 1051 Norcent 1003, 0872, 1107, 1265 Nova 1517 PRO151FD.book Page 143 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
144 En 08 Appendix 8.2.11 DVD (Brands O - Z) 8.2.12 LD Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Onkyo 0503, 0627, 1769 Oppo 0575, 1224, 2185 Optimus 0571 OptoMedia Electronics 0896 Oritron 0651 P alsonic 0672, 0852 Pa n a s o n i c 0503, 0490, 0571, 0703, 1641, 1762 Philco 0675 Philip s 0503, 0539, 0646, 0675, 1267, 1340, 1354, 1846, 2056, 2084 Phonotrend 0699 Pi a n o D is c 1024 Pioneer 0525, 0571, 0142, 0631, 1475, 1476, 1571, 1460, 1512, 1902, 2052 P olaroid 1020, 1061, 1086, 1245, 1316, 1478, 2130 Po l k A u d i o 0539 P ortland 0770 P residian 0675, 1072, 1738 Pr i m a r e 1618 Pr o c e ed 0672 Pr o s c an 0522 P rosonic 0699 P roVision 0778 Qwestar 0651 Radionette 0741 Radi o Sha ck 0571 RCA 0522, 0571, 0717, 0790, 0822, 1022, 1769 Real is ti c 0571 Reoc 0752 Rev o y 0699 Rio 0869, 2002 RJT ech 0118, 1360 Rot e l 0623, 1178 Row a 0823, 1004 Saba 0651 Sampo 0698, 0752, 1501 Samsung 0298, 0490, 0573, 0744, 0199, 0820, 1044, 1075, 1470, 2069 Sansui 0695 Sanyo 0670, 0675, 0695, 0873, 1334 Schneider 0783 Schwaiger 0752 Sensor y Science 1158 Sharp 0630, 0675, 0752, 1256 Sharper Image 1117 Sher wood 0633, 0770, 1043, 1077, 1889 Shinsonic 0533, 0839 Slim Art 0784 SM Electronic 0730 Sonic Blue 0573, 0715, 0783, 0869, 1099, 2002 Sony 0533, 0772, 0864, 1033, 1070, 1431, 1516, 1533, 1548, 1633, 1791, 1824, 1892, 1903, 1904, 1934, 2020, 2043 Sova 1122 Sungale 1074 SV A 0717, 0860, 1105 Sylvania 0675, 1268 Symphonic 0675, 0894, 1268, 1334 T AG McLaren 0894 T atung 0770 Te a c 0571, 0717, 0692, 0790 T echnics 0490, 0703 T e chnika 0770 T e chnosonic 0730 Te c h w o o d 0692 T e rapin 1031 Te v i o n 0651 Theta Digital 0571 Thomson 0522, 0511 TiVo 1503, 1512, 1588 To s h i b a 0503, 0573, 0539, 0695, 1154, 1503, 1510, 1588, 1608, 1769 T redex 0800, 0803, 0804 Unimax 0770 United 0730 Universum 0591 Urban Concepts 0503, 0539 US Logic 0839 V 1064, 1226 V enturer 0790 Vi zi o 1064, 1226 V ocopro 1027, 1360 We s d e r 0699 Xbox 0522, 1708, 2083 Ya m a h a 0490, 0539, 0545, 0497, 0817 Ya m a k a w a 0872 Zenith 0503, 0591, 0741, 0869 Zeus 0784 Zoece 1265 Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Brand/Code Car ver 0064, 0194, 0323 Denon 0059, 0172, 0241 Disco Vision 0023 Harman/Kardon 0194 Hitachi 0023, 0395 Magnavox 0064, 0194, 0217, 0241 Marantz 0064, 0194 Mitsubishi 0059, 0241 NAD 0059 NEC 0286 Optimus 0059 P anasonic 0204 Philips 0064, 0194 Pioneer 0059, 0023, 0241, 0463, 0572, 1274 Po l k A u d i o 0194 Quasar 0204 Ren a i ss a n ce 0323 Samsung 0323 Sega 0023 Sharp 0001 Sony 0193, 0201, 0270 T echnics 0204 Theta Digital 0194 To s h i b a 0059 Vi ct o r 0245 Wa r d s 0059 Ya m a h a 0217 PRO151FD.book Page 144 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
145 En 08 Appendix 8.3 Specifications Flat Pane l TV PRO-151FD (60”) PRO-111FD (50”) Number of pixels 1920 × 1080 pixels 1920 × 1080 pixels Audio Amplifier 18 W 18 W (1 kH z, 10 %, 6 Ω ) 18 W 18 W ( 1 kHz, 10 %, 6 Ω ) Speaker W oofer: 4.8 cm x 13 cm cone type T weeter: 2.5 cm semidome type W oofer : 4.8 cm x 13 cm co ne type T weeter: 2.5 cm semidome type Sound Effect SRS FOCUS/SRS/SRS T ruBass/ SRS Definition SRS FOCUS/SRS/SR S T ruBass/ SRS Definiti on On-Screen Languages English , F renc h, Spani sh En glish, French, Spanis h Power Requirement 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 52 4 W (0.3 W Standby) 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 436 W (0.2 W Standby) Weight Main unit: 51.0 kg (112.4 lbs) Stand: 6.1 kg (13. 4 lbs) (including bolts) Speaker: 4.1 kg (9.0 lbs) (including cables, speaker brackets and screws) Color Senso r: 0.1 kg (0.2 lbs) T otal: 61.3 kg (135.1 lbs) Main unit: 33.8 kg (74.5 lbs) Stand: 2.5 kg (5.6 lbs)(inc luding bolts) Speaker: 3.6 kg (7.9 lbs) (including ca bles, speaker brackets and screws) Color Sensor : 0.1 kg (0.2 l bs) T otal: 39.9 kg (88.0 l bs) Reception Syste m Digital A TSC Digital TV system Circuit Type 8VSB/64QAM/256QAM Tuner VHF/UHF VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch. 14 to 69 Tuner CATV Ch. 2 to 135 Audio format Dolby Digita l Analog American TV st andard NTSC system Circuit Type Vide o signal detection PLL ful l synchronous detection, PLL dig ital Synthesizer system Tuner VHF/UHF VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch. 14 to 69 Tuner CATV Cable Ch. 1 to 135 Air Ch. 1 to 125 Audio multiplex BTSC system Terminals - Side INPUT 3 VIDEO in, A UDIO in INPUT 7 HDMI in* PHONES 16 Ω to 32 Ω recommended USB USB in** PRO151FD.book Page 145 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
146 En 08 Appendix * conforms to HDMI1.3 (D eep Color) and HDCP1.1 ** conforms to USB 1 .1 and 2.0 HDMI (High-Definiti on Multimedia Interface) is a digital interface that handles both vi deo and audio using a single cable. HDCP (High-bandwidth Digi tal Content Pr otection) is a technology used to protect copyrighted di gital contents that use the Digi tal Visual Interface (DVI). Note: Design and speci fications are subject to change without notice. Dimensions Terminals - Rear ANT 75 Ω UNBAL, F T ype for DTV/VHF/UHF/CA TV in INPUT 1 S- VIDEO in, VIDEO in , AUDIO in INPUT 2 COMPONENT VIDEO in, VIDEO in , AUDIO in INPUT 4 HDMI in*, A UDIO in PC INPUT Analog RGB in, A UDIO in COLOR SENSOR 1 INPUT 5 HDMI in*, A UDIO in INPUT 6 HDMI in* AUDIO OUT AU DI O o u t ( F ix e d ) IR REPEATER OUT 1 DIGITAL OU T Optical ETHERNET 1 CONTROL OUT 1 SPEAKERS 6 Ω to 16 Ω SUB WOOFER OUT Va r i a b l e 922 (36-5/16) 93 (3-21/32) 1677 (66-1/32) 430 (16-15/16) 953 (37-17/32) 876 (34-1/2) 350 (13-25/32) 93 (3-21/32) 552 (21-23/32) 788 PRO-151FD (60” panel) PRO-111FD (50” panel) 1445 (56-7/8) 788 (31-1/32) 75 (2-31/ 32) 14 (9/16) 75 (2-31/32) 14 (9/16) 723 (28-15/32) PRO151FD.book Page 146 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
147 En 08 Appendix License [MPEG4IP] This software is based in part on Mozilla P ublic Li cense 1.1 see http://www .mozilla.org/MPL/ for information . [OpenSSL] OpenSSL License Copyright © 1998-2007 The OpenSSL P roject. Al l rights reser ved. Redi stribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification , are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following discla imer . 2. Redistributions in binar y form must reproduce the ab ove copyright notice, this li st of conditions and the following disclaimer in the docume ntation an d/or other ma terials provid ed with the di stribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software mu st display the foll owing acknowledgment: “This product includes sof tware dev eloped by the OpenSSL P rojec t for use in the OpenSSL T oolkit. (http://www .openssl.org/)”. 4. The names “OpenSSL T oolkit” and “OpenSSL P roject” must not be use d to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permissi on. F or written permission, please contact openssl- core@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this softwa re may not be ca lled “OpenSSL ” nor may “OpenSSL ” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL P roject. 6. Redistributions o f any form whatso ever must retain the following ackn owledgment: “This product in cludes software developed by the OpenSSL P roject for use in the OpenSSL T oolkit (h ttp://w ww .openssl.org/)”. THIS SOF TWARE IS PROVI D ED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “ AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED W ARRANTIES, INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , TH E IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PURPOSE ARE DISCL AIMED . IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT , INDIRECT , INCIDENT AL, SPECIAL, EXEMPL ARY , OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INC LUDING, BU T NOT LIMI TED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; L OSS OF USE, DA T A , OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY , WHETHER IN CONTRACT , STRICT LIABILITY , OR TORT (INCL UDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY W AY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product incl udes cr yptographic software written by Eric Y oung (eay@cryptsof t.com). This produc t includes software written by T im Hudson (tjh@cryptsof t.com). Original SSLeay License Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Y oung (eay@cr yptsof t.com) All rights res er ved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Er ic Y oung (eay@cr yptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscap es SSL. This librar y is free for co mmercial and non-comme rcial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. Th e following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution , be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL c ode. The SSL documentat ion included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsof t.com). Copyright remains Eric Y oung’s, and as su ch any Copyrigh t notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Y oung should be given attribut io n as the author of the parts of the libra r y used. This can be in the form of a textual messa ge at program start up or in documen tation (on line or textual) prov ided with the package. Redi stribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification , are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: PRO151FD.book Page 147 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
148 En 08 Appendix 1. R ed istribut ions of sou rce code mu st retai n the copyri ght notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer . 2. R ed istributio ns in bi nar y f orm must reproduce the ab ove copyrigh t notice, this li st of c ondition s and the following disclaimer in the docu mentation and/or other ma terials provid ed with the distri bution. 3. All advertising materials me ntioning fe atures or use of this software mu st display the following acknowledgement : “T his product includes cr yptographic sof tware written b y Eric Y oung (eay@ cr yptsof t.com )” The word ‘cr yptographic’ ca n be left out if the routines from the librar y being used are not cr yptographic related:-). 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivati ve thereof) from the apps director y (application code) you must include an acknowled gement: “ This product includes sof tware written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)” THIS SOF TWA RE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “ A S IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED W ARRANTIES, INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPLIED W A RRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABIL ITY AND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PURPO SE ARE DISCL AIMED. IN NO EV ENT SHAL L THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT , INDIRECT , INCIDENT AL, SPECIA L, EXEMPLARY , OR CO NSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCL UDING, BU T NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOS S OF USE, DA T A, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOW EVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY , WH E TH ER I N C O NT RA C T , S T RI C T L IA B IL IT Y , OR T OR T (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY W AY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOF TW ARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e . this code cannot simply be copied an d put under another distribut ion licence [including t he GNU P ublic Licence.] [tiff] Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. THE SOF TWA RE IS PROVIDED “ AS-IS” AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCL UDING WITHOUT LIMIT A TION, ANY W ARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LE FFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHA TSOEVER RESUL TING FROM L OSS OF USE, DA T A OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY , ARISING OU T OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOF TWARE. [Howl] Copyright © 2003, 2004 Po rchdog Sof tware All rights reserved. THIS SOF TWA RE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGH T HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “ AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED W ARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPL IED W ARRANTI ES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PU RPOSE ARE DIS CLAIMED . IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FO R ANY DIRECT , INDIRECT , INCIDENT AL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY , OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVIC ES; L O SS OF USE, DA T A, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) H O W E V E R C AUS E D AN D O N AN Y T H EO R Y O F L IA B I L I T Y , WHETH ER IN CONTRA CT , STRICT LIABILITY , OR TORT (INCL UDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERW ISE) ARISING IN ANY W AY OU T OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, E VEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This software is based in part on Apple Pu blic Source License or the recent’s rights thereunder s ee http:// developer .apple.com/ for information . [libupnp] Copyright © 2000-2003 Intel Corporation All rights reser ved. Redis tribution and use in sou rce and binar y forms, with or with out modification , are permitted provided tha t the following conditions are met: PRO151FD.book Page 148 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
149 En 08 Appendix * Red istributions of source code mus t retain the above copyright no tice, this list of condit ions and the following disclaimer . * Redistributions in bina r y form m ust reproduce th e above copyrig ht notice, this list of conditi ons and the following disclaimer in the docu mentation and/or other ma terials provid ed with the distri bution. * Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of its contributors may be us ed to endorse or promote products derived from this sof tware wi thout specific prior written permission. THIS SOF TWA RE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGH T HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “ AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED W ARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPL IED W ARRANTI ES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCL AIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CO NTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR A NY DIRECT , INDIRECT , INCIDENT AL, SPECIAL, EXEMPL ARY , OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ( INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , PROCU REMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; L OSS OF USE, DA T A, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY , WHETHER IN CONTRACT , STRI CT LIABILITY , OR TORT (INCL UDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWIS E) ARISING I N ANY WA Y OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOF TWA RE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. [JPEG image compression] If only ex ecutable code is dis tributed, the n the accom panyin g documen tation mu st state tha t “this sof twa re is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group”. [libpng] COPYRIGHT NOTIC E, DISCLA IMER , and LICENS E: If you modi fy l ibpng you m ay insert add itional no tices immedi ately foll owing thi s sentence. libpng versio ns 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.2. 25, Februar y 18, 2008, are Copyright © 2004, 2006-2008 Glenn R anders-P ehrson, and are distributed accord ing to the sa me disclaimer and lic e nse as libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual added to the list of Contributing Authors Cosmin T ruta libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - Octobe r 3, 2002, are Copyright © 2000-2002 Glenn Randers- P ehrson, and are dis tributed according to the same disc laimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the follow ing individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Simon-P ierre Cadieux Eric S. R aymond Gilles V ollant and with the following additi ons to the disclaimer: There is no warranty against inter ference with your enjoym ent of the librar y or again st infrin gemen t. The re is no warranty that our efforts or the librar y will fulfill any of yo ur particul ar purposes or need s. This librar y is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactor y qual ity , per formance, accuracy , and effort is with the user . libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, th rough 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Co pyright © 1998, 1999 Glenn R anders- P ehrson, and are dis tributed according to the same disc laimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the fol lowing individuals adde d to the list of Contributing Auth ors: To m L a n e Glenn Rand ers-Pe hrson Wille m van Schaik libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyrigh t © 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and li cense as libpng-0.88, with the follo wing individuals added to the list of Contributing Au thors: John Bowler Kevin Bracey Sam Bushell Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs To m T a n n e r PRO151FD.book Page 149 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
150 En 08 Appendix libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, th rough 0.88, January 1996, are Copyrigh t © 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. F or the purposes of this copyright and license, “Contr ibuting Authors” is defined as the following set of individuals: Andreas Dilger Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat P aul Schmidt Tim W e gn er The PNG Ref erence Librar y is supplied “ AS IS”. The Co ntributing Authors a nd Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, includ ing, without limitation , the warra ntie s of merchantabil ity and of fitness for any purpose. The Contribu ting Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary , or consequential damage s, which may result from the u se of the P NG Reference Li brar y , ev en if advised of the possibil ity of such damage. P ermission is hereby granted to use, copy , modify , and distribute this source code, or po rtions hereof , for any purpose, without fee, subject to the fo llowing re striction s: 1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented. 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source. 3. T his Copyright notice may not be removed or altere d from any source or alte red source distribution. The Contributi ng Authors and Group 42, In c. speci fically permit, wi thout fee, and en courage the use of this source code as a component t o supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment is not re quired but would be appreciated. A “png_get_copyright” function is available, for convenient use in “abo ut” boxes and the like: printf(“%s”,png_get_copyrigh t(NULL)); Also, the PNG log o (in PN G format, of course) is su pplied in the files “pngbar .png ” and “pngbar .jp g”(88x31) and “pngn ow .png” (98x31). Libpng is OSI Certi fied Open Source Software. OSI Certif ied Open Source is a certi f ication mark of the Open Source Initiative. Glenn Rand ers-Pe hrson glennrp at users.source forge.net F ebruar y 18, 2008 [zlib] This software is based in part on zlib see http://www .zlib.net for information . [FreeType] The F reeT ype P roject is Copyright © 1996-2000 by David T u rner , Ro bert Wilhelm, and W e rner Lemberg. All rights reser ved except as specified below . THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED “ AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INC L UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, W ARRA NTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE A UTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CA USED BY THE USE OR THE INA BILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT . [GIFLIB] The GIFLIB distribution is Co pyright © 1997 Eric S. R aymond THE SOF TWA RE IS PROVIDED “ AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCL UDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY , FITNESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT . IN NO EVENT SHALL THE A UTHORS OR CO PYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY , WHETHE R IN AN ACTION OF CONTRA CT , TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOF TW ARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOF TWARE. PRO151FD.book Page 150 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
151 En 08 Appendix [TinyLogin] This software is Copyright 1988 - 1994, Ju lianne F rances Haug h. All rights reser ved. [portmap] Copyright © Sun Mi crosystems, Inc. Sun RPC is a product of Sun Microsyste ms, Inc. and is prov ided for unrestricted use prov ided that this legend is included on al l tape media and as a part of t he sof tware program in whole or part. Users may copy or modify Sun RPC without charge, but are not authorized to license or distribute it to anyo ne else except as part of a product or program developed by the user or with the express written consent of Sun Microsystems, Inc. SUN RPC IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO WARRANTI ES OF ANY KIND IN CLUDIN G THE WA RRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A P ARTIC UL AR PURPOSE, OR ARISIN G FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE OR TR ADE PRACTICE. Sun RPC is provided with no support and withou t any obligation on the part of Sun Microsystems, Inc. to assist in its use, correction, mo dification or enh ancement. SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. SH ALL HA VE NO LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHTS, TRADE SECR ETS OR ANY P A TENTS BY SUN R PC OR ANY P ART THERE OF . In no event will Sun Microsystems, Inc. be liable for any lost revenue or pr ofits or other special, indirect and consequential damages, even if Sun has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Sun Microsyste ms, Inc. 2550 Garcia Avenue Mountain View , California 94043 [libpcap] Copyright © 2000 T orsten Land schoff <torsten@debian.org> Sebastia n Krahmer <krah mer@cs.uni-pot sdam.de> License: BSD Redi stribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification , are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following discla imer . 2. Redistributions in binar y form must reproduce the ab ove copyright notice, this li st of conditions and the following disclaimer in the docume ntation an d/or other ma terials provid ed with the di stribution. 3. The names of the authors may not be used to endo rse or promote products derived from this sof tware without specific prior written permission . THIS SOF TW ARE IS PROVIDED “ AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED W A RRANTIES, INCL UDING, WITHOUT LIMIT A TION, THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AN D FITNESS FOR A P A RTICUL AR PURPOSE. [libmpeg1] Copyright © 1992 The R egents of the University of California Copyright © 1994-1999 Gregory P . W ard <gward@python.net> All rights res er ved. This software is supplied without even the faintest shr ed of assuranc e tha t it works in it s entirety . P ermission to use, copy , modif y , and distribute this software and its docume ntation for any purpose, with out fee, and without written agreement is hereby granted, provided that the above co pyright notice and the following two paragraphs appear in all copies of this software. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIAB LE TO ANY P ARTY FOR DIRECT , INDIRECT , SPECIAL , INCIDENT AL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE S ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOF TWARE AND ITS DOCUMENT A TION, EVEN IF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNI A HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. THE AUTHOR SPECIFICALL Y DISCL AIMS ANY W ARRANTI ES , INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OF ERCHANT ABILITY AN D FITNESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PURPOSE. THE SOF TWARE PROVIDED PRO151FD.book Page 151 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
152 En 08 Appendix HEREUNDER IS ON AN “ AS IS” BASIS, AND THE AUTH OR HAS NO BLIGA TION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT , UPDA TES, ENHANCEM ENTS, OR MODIFICA TIONS. [GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE] V ersion 2, June 1991 Copyright © 1989, 1991 F ree Software Foundation , Inc., 51 F r anklin Street, Fifth Floor , Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Ever yone is permitted to co py and distribute ver batim co pies of this li cense do cume nt, bu t changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licen ses for mos t sof tware are desi gned to take away you r freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General P ublic License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software - to make sure the software is free for all its users. This Genera l Public License applies to most of the F ree Sof tware F ounda tion’s software and to any ot her program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other F ree Sof tware F oundation sof tware is covered by th e GNU Lesser General P ublic License instead.) Y ou can apply it to your programs, too . When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedo m, not price. Our General Public Li censes are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute co pi es of free software (and charge for this ser vice if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you wa nt it, that you can change th e software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that yo u know you can do these things. T o protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These rest rictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the sof tware, or if you modif y it. F or example, if you distribute copies of such a p rogram, wh ether gratis or fo r a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. Y ou must make sure that th ey , too, receive or can get th e source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. W e protect your rights wit h two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to co py , distribute and/or mo dify the sof tware. Also, for each author ’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that ev er yone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the so f tware is modified by someone else an d pass ed on, we want its recipi ents to know that what they ha ve is not the original, so that any pr oblems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations. Finally , any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. W e wish to avoid the danger that redistributo rs of a free program will indi vidually obtain patent licenses , in effect ma king the program proprietar y . T o prevent this, we hav e made it clear that any patent mu st be licensed for ever yone’s free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms an d conditions for copying, d istribution and modification follow . GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITION S FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICA TION 0. This License applies to any program or other work wh ich contains a noti ce placed by the copyrig ht holder saying it may be distributed und er the terms of this Gene ral P ublic Licens e. The “Progr am”, below , refers to any such program or work, and a “ work based on the Program” means either the P rogram or any derivat ive work under copyright law : that is to say , a work containing the P rogram or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modificati ons and/or translat ed into another lang uage. (H ereinaf ter , translation is in cluded without limitation in the term “modification”.) Each licens ee is addressed a s “ you”. Activiti es other than copying, distribution and modificati on are not covered by this Lic ense; they are outside its scope. The act of running the P rogram is not restricted, and the output from the P r ogram is covered only if its conten ts constitute a w ork based on the P rogram (independe nt of having been made by running th e Pr ogram). Whether that is true depends on what the P rogram does. 1. Y ou may copy and distribute verbat im copies of the P rog ram’s source co de as you rec eive it, in any me dium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publis h on each copy an appropria te copyright notice and disclaim er of warranty; keep intact all th e notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any ot her recipients of the P rogram a copy of this License along with th e P rogram. Y ou may charge a PRO151FD.book Page 152 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
153 En 08 Appendix fee for the physical act of t ransferring a copy , and you may at your option offer warranty prot ection in exchange for a fee. 2. Y ou may modify your copy or copies of the P rogram or any portion of it, thus fo rming a work based on the P rogram, an d copy and distribute such modifications or work under the term s of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) Y ou must cause the modified files to carr y prominen t notic es stating that you changed the files and the date of any chan ge. b ) Y o u m u s t c a u s e a n y w o r k t h a t y o u d i s tr i b u t e o r p u b l i s h, t h a t i n w h o l e o r i n p a r t c o n t a i n s o r i s d e r iv e d f r o m the P rogram or any part thereof , to be licens ed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactivel y when run , you must cause it, when started running for such interactiv e use in the mos t ordi nar y way , to pr int or disp lay an an nouncement including an appropriate copyright n otice and a no tice that there is no warranty (or el se, saying th at you provid e a warranty) and th at users may redistribute the pro gram under these condition s, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (E xception : if the Program itse lf is int e ractive but does not normally print such an announcemen t, your work based on the P rogram is not required to print an announc ement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be rea sonably con sidered in depende nt and separa te works in them selves, th en this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you dist ribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the P rogram, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License , wh ose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and ever y part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your righ ts to work writte n entirely by you; rath er , the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of de rivative or collecti ve work s based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of anot her work not based on the P rogram with the Program (or with a work based on the P rogram) on a volume of a storage or distrib ution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this Licens e. 3. Y ou may copy and distribute the P rogra m (or a work base d on it, u nder Sectio n 2) in obje ct code o r executab le form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above pr ovided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machin e-readable source code, which must be distribu ted under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medi um customar ily used for so ftware interchange; or , b) Accompany it with a written offer , valid for at least thre e years, to give any th ird party , for a charg e no more than your cost of physically per f orming source di stribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding s ource code, to be distr ibuted under the terms of Sectio ns 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software intercha ng e; or , it l inking pr oprietar y application s with the lib rar y. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser Gene ral Public Lic ense ins tead o f this L icense. c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed onl y for noncommercial di stribution and only if yo u received the program in object cod e or executable fo rm with such an offer , in accord wit h Subsection b above .) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for ma king modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for al l modules it contains, plus any associated inter face definition files, plus the scripts used to control compil ation and instal lation of the execut able. However , as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anythi ng that is normally distributed (in either source or binar y form) with the major compon ents (compiler , kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equi valent access to copy the source code from the same plac e counts as distribution of the source code, even though third pa rties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. Y ou may not copy , modify , sublicense, or distribute the P rogram except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt other wise to copy , modif y , subl ic ense or distribute the P rogram is void, and will automatically terminate your rights un der this License. However , parties wh o ha ve received copies, or righ ts, from you under this License will not have their licenses termin ated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. Y ou are not required to accept this License, since you hav e not signed it. However , nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. Th ese actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modi f ying or distributing the P rogram (or any work based on the PRO151FD.book Page 153 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
154 En 08 Appendix P rogram), you indicate you r acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the P rogram or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the P r ogram (or any work based on the P r ogram), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy , distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions . Y ou may not impose any further restrictions on the recipien ts’ exercise of the rights granted herein. Y ou are not responsib le for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If , as a conseque nce of a court ju dgment or allegation of patent infringe ment or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues) , conditio ns are im posed on y ou (wheth er by court order , ag reement o r other wis e) that contradic t the condit ions of th is License, th ey do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so a s to satisfy simultaneously your obligations un der this License and an y other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence yo u may not distrib ute the P rogram at all. F or example, if a pa tent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those w ho receive co pies directly or indirectly through you, then the on ly way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entire ly from distribution of the P rogram. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unen forceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intend ed to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section t o induce you to in fringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest vali dity of any such cl aims; this section has th e sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contribu tions to the wide range of sof tware dist ributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to d ecide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system an d a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear wh at is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is re stricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright ho lder who plac es the P rogram under this License may add an explicit geographical distribu tion limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries no t thus excluded. In such case, thi s License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The F ree Sof tware F oundation may publish revised a nd/or new versions of the General P ublic License from time to time. Such new ve rsions will be simi lar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or co ncerns. Each version is give n a distinguishing version number . If the P rogram specifies a version numbe r of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of followi ng the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the F ree Sof tware F oundation. If the P rogram does not specif y a versio n number o f this Licens e, you may cho o se any version ever publis hed by the F ree Sof tware Fo u n da ti on . 10.If you wish to incorporate parts of the P rogram into other free programs whose distributi on conditions are different, write to the au thor to as k for permission. F or soft ware which is copyrighte d by the F ree Software F oun dation, write to the Free Softw are Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preservi ng the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally . NO WARRANTY 11.BECA USE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO W ARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMIT TED BY A PPLICABLE LAW . EXCEPT WH EN OTHERWISE ST A T ED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER P ARTIES PROVIDE TH E PROGRAM “ AS IS” WITHOUT W ARRANTY O F ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, IN CL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QU ALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, Y OU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REP AIR OR CORRECTION. 12.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE L A W OR AGREED TO IN WR ITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER , OR ANY OTHER P ARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRI BUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMIT TED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCL UDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCL UDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO L OSS OF DA T A OR DA T A BEING RENDERED INACCURA TE OR L OSSES PRO151FD.book Page 154 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
155 En 08 Appendix SUST AINED BY YOU OR THIRD P ARTIES OR A FAIL URE OF THE PR OGRAM TO OPERA T E WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER O R OTHER P ARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBIL ITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Yo ur New Programs If you develop a new program, and you wa nt it to be of th e greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which ever yone can redi stribute and change under these terms. T o do so , attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach th em to the start of each source file to most effectively conve y the exclusion of warranty ; and ea ch file should have at le ast the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the pr ogram’s name and a brief idea of what it does .> Copyright © <year> <name of author> This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modif y it unde r the terms of the GNU General Pu blic License as published by the F ree Software Foundation; either versi on 2 of the Li cense, or (at your option) any la ter version . This program is distributed i n the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT AN Y WARRANTY ; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANT ABILITY or FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. Y ou should have received a copy of the GNU General P ublic License along with this pr og ram; if not, write to the F ree Sof tware F oundation, Inc., 51 F ranklin Street, Fifth Floor , Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA. Also add information on how to cont act you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interacti ve mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright © year name of author Gnomovision comes wi th ABSOL UTEL Y NO W ARRANTY ; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under ce rtain conditions; type ‘show c’ for d etails. The hypothetical comman ds ‘show w’ an d ‘show c’ shou ld show the appropriate parts of the General P ublic License. Of course, the commands you use may b e called something othe r than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; t hey could even be mouse-clicks or menu it ems - whatever suits your program. Y ou should also g et your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your sc hool, if any , to sign a “copyright disclaimer ” for the program, if necessa ry. Here is a sample; alter the names: Y oyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all co pyright interest i n th e program ‘Gnomovision ’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker . <signature of T y Coon>, 1 April 1989 T y Coon, P resident of Vice This General P ublic License does not permit incorporat ing you r program in to prop rietar y programs. If your program is a subroutine librar y , you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the librar y . If this is what you want to do , use the GN U Lesser General P ublic License instead of this License. [GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LI CENSE] V ersion 2.1, F ebruar y 1999 Copyright © 1991, 1999 F ree So ftware F oundation, Inc. 51 F ranklin Street, Fifth Floor , Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Ever yone is permitted to copy and dist ribute verbatim copies of this licen se documen t, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Pu blic License, version 2, hence the version numb er 2.1.] PRO151FD.book Page 155 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
156 En 08 Appendix Preamble The licen ses for mos t sof tware are desi gned to take away you r freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General P ublic Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software - to make sure the software is free for all its users. This li cens e, the Lesser General P ublic License, ap plies to some specially designated software packages - typically libraries - of the F ree Software F oundation and other authors who decide to use it. Y ou can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefu lly about whether this license or the ordinar y General P ublic License is the better strategy to use in any particular ca se, based on the explanations below . When we speak of free software, we are referring to freed om of use, not price. Our General P ublic Licenses are designed to make sure that you have th e freedom to distribute copies of free softwa re (and charge for this ser vice if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you wa nt it; that you can change th e sof tware and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you c an do these things. T o protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictio ns transl ate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the librar y or if you modif y it. F or example, if you distribute copies of the librar y , whethe r gratis or for a fee , you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. Y ou must make sure that they , too, receive or can get the source c ode. If you lin k other code with the librar y , you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so th at they can relink them with the librar y af ter making chan ges to the libr ar y and recomp iling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. W e protect your righ ts with a two -step method: (1) we copy right the librar y , an d (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy , distribute and/or modify the library . T o protect eac h distribu tor , we want to make it ver y clear that there is no w arranty for the f ree librar y . Also, if the librar y is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should kn ow that what they have is not the original version, so that the ori ginal a u t h o r ’ s r e p u t a t i o n w i l l n o t b e a f f e c t e d b y p r o b l e m s t h a t m i g h t b e i n t r o d u c e d by others. Finall y , s of tw are p ate nt s po se a con sta nt t hre at t o th e e xist enc e of an y fre e pr ogr am . W e wis h to mak e s ure tha t a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restri ctive lic ense fro m a pa tent holder . Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the librar y must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some lib raries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General P ublic License. This license, the GNU Lesser General P ublic License, applies to certai n designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinar y General P ublic License. W e use this licens e for certain libraries in or der to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs. When a program is linked with a library , whether statically or using a shared librar y, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combin ed work, a derivative of the original lib rar y . The ordinary General P u blic License therefore permits such lin king only i f the en tire combi nation fi ts its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General P ublic License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library . W e call this license the “Lesser ” General P ublic License be cause it does Less to protect the user ’s freedom than the ordinar y General P ublic License. It also provides ot her free sof tware developers Less of an advantag e over competin g non-f ree programs . These d isadvanta ges are th e reason we use the ordinar y General Public License for many libraries. However , the Lesser license prov ides ad vantages in cert ain special circumstances. F or example, on rare occasions, ther e may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain librar y , so that it becomes a de-facto standard. T o achieve this, non-free pro grams must be allowed to use the librar y . A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only , so we use the Lesser General P ublic License. In other cases, permission to use a particula r librar y in non-f ree programs enables a greater n umber of pe ople to use a large body of free software. F or example, permission t o u s e t h e G N U C L i b r a r y i n n o n - f r e e p r o g r a m s e n a b l e s many mo re people t o use th e whole G NU opera ting syst em, as w ell as it s variant , the GNU Linux op erating system. Al though the Lesser General Pu blic License is Less protective of the user s’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with th e Librar y has the freedom and the wher ewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library . The precise te rms and cond itions for co pying, distrib ution and modificati on follow . P ay clos e attention to the difference between a “ work based on the librar y” and a “ work that uses the library ”. The former contains code derived from the library , whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. PRO151FD.book Page 156 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
157 En 08 Appendix GNU LESSER GENE RAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MOD IFICA TION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software librar y or other program which cont ains a notice placed by the copyright hold er or other autho rized party saying it ma y be distributed und er the te rms of this Lesser General P ublic License (also called “this License” ). Each licensee is addressed as “you”. A “library ” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (whic h use some of those functions and data) to form executa bles. The “Librar y ”, below , refers to any su ch software librar y or work which has been dis tributed under these terms. A “work based on the Librar y ” means either the Librar y or any derivative work under copyr ight law : that is to say , a work containing the Librar y or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modificatio ns and/or translated straightforwardly into an other language. (Her einaf ter , tr anslation is included with out limitation in the term “modification ”.) “Source code” for a work means the pref erred form of the work for making modifications t o it. F or a library , complete source code mea ns all the source code for all modules it co ntains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library . Activities other than copying, distribu tion and modification are n ot covered by this License; th ey are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Librar y is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only i f its contents c onstitute a work b ased on the Librar y (independent of the use of the Librar y in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on wha t the Librar y does and what the program th at uses the Librar y does. 1. Y ou may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Li brar y ’s complete source code as you receiv e it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously a nd appropriat ely publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and discl aimer of warranty ; keep intact all the notic es that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty ; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Librar y . Y ou may charge a fee for the physica l act of transferri ng a copy , and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. Y ou may modify your copy or copies of the Librar y or an y portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library , and copy and distribute su ch modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 a bove, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must it sel f be a sof tware librar y . b) Y ou must cause the files modifie d to carr y prominen t notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any chan ge. c) Y ou must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Librar y refers to a f unction or a table of data to be supplied by an applicat ion program that uses the facility , other th an as an argu ment passed when the facility is in voked, then you mu st ma k e a g oo d f a it h e f fo rt t o e ns u re t ha t, in t he event an application does no t supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs what ever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (F or example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purp ose that is en tirely well- defined independent of the application . Ther efore, Subsection 2d require s that any application-supplied function or table used by this functi on must be optional: if the applic ation doe s not supply it, the square root function must still co mpute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modifi ed work as a wh o le. If i dentifia ble sectio ns of tha t work are not derived from the Librar y , and can be reason ably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and it s terms, do not apply to those sect ions when you distribute the m as s e p a r a t e w o r k s . B u t w h e n y o u d i s t r i b u t e t h e s a m e s e c t i o n s a s p a r t o f a w h o l e w h i c h i s a w o r k b a s e d o n t h e Librar y , the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, wh ose permissions for other licensees extend t o the ent ire whole , and thu s to each and ever y part re gardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this sect ion to claim rights or contest your righ ts to work written entirely by you; rather , the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of de rivative or collective works based on the Librar y . In addition, mere aggregation of an other work not based on the Librar y with the Librar y (or with a work based on the Li brar y) on a volum e of a storage or di stribution medi um does not bring the other work under the scope of this Licens e. 3. Y ou may opt to apply the terms of the ordinar y GNU Gene ral P ubl ic Licen se inst ead of this Lice nse to a given copy of the Librar y . T o do this, you must alter all the noti ces th at refer to this License, so t hat they refer to the PRO151FD.book Page 157 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
158 En 08 Appendix ordinary GNU General P ublic License, version 2, instead of to th is License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General P ublic License has appeared, th en you can speci f y that vers ion ins tead if yo u wish.) Do not make any other change in these notice s. Once this change is made in a given copy , it is irreversible for that copy , so the ordinar y GNU General P ublic License applies to all subs equent copies a n d de ri va ti v e w o r k s m a de f r o m t ha t co py. T h is op ti o n i s u se f ul wh en you wish to c opy part of the c ode of the Librar y into a program that is not a librar y . 4. Y ou may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Secti on 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 ab ove provided that you ac co mpany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering ac cess to copy from a designat ed place, the n offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisf ies the requirement to dist ribute the source code, even t hough third parties are not compell ed to copy the source along with th e object code. 5. A program that contains no deriva tive of any portion of the Li brar y , but is designed to work wi th the Librar y by being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Librar y ”. Such a work, in is olation , is not a derivative work of the Library , and theref ore falls outside the scope of this License. However , li nking a “ work tha t uses the Libr ar y ” with the Li brar y creates an executable th at is a derivative of the Library (because it contains porti ons of the Library), ra ther than a “ work that uses th e librar y ”. The executable is therefore covered by this Li cense. Section 6 st ates terms for di stribution of such executables. When a “work that uses the Library ” uses material from a header file that is part of the Librar y , the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the wo rk can be linked without the Library , or if the work is itself a librar y . The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law . If such an object fil e uses only numerical parame ters, data structure layout s and accessors, and small macros and small inline func tions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables co ntainin g this object code pl us portions of the Librar y will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Librar y , you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables co ntaining that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Librar y itself . 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also co mbine or link a “ work that uses the Librar y” with the Librar y to produc e a work containing portions of th e Li brar y , and distribute th at work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms perm it modification of the work for the customer ’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications . Y ou must give prominent no tice with each copy of the wo rk t hat the Library is used in it an d that the Library and its use are covered by this Li cense. Y ou must supply a copy of this Li cense. If the work duri ng execution displays copyright notices, you must includ e the copyright notice for th e Librar y among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also , you must do one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complet e correspondi ng machine-readabl e source code for the Librar y including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sec tions 1 and 2 above) ; and, if the work is an executa ble lin ked with the Librar y , with the complete machine-readable “work that uses th e Librar y ”, as object code and /or source code, so that the user can modif y the Librar y and then relink to produce a modified execut able containing the modified Librar y . (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Librar y will not necess arily be able to re compile the ap plication to use th e modified definitions.) b) Use a suitabl e shared librar y mechanism for linking wi th the Library . A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the librar y already presen t on the user ’s computer system, rath er than copying librar y functions into the executable, and (2) will operat e properly with a modified version of the librar y , if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is inter face-compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompa ny the work with a written offer , valid for at least t hree years, to give the same user th e materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no mo re than the cost of performing this distributi on. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. e) V erif y that the user has already rece ived a copy of these materials or that you have a lready sent this user a copy . PRO151FD.book Page 158 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
159 En 08 Appendix F or an executable, the required form of the “ work that uses th e Librar y ” must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. Howev er , as a sp ecial exception, the materials to be distributed n eed not include anythi ng that is normally dist ributed (in either source or binar y form) with the major components (compiler , kern el, and so on) of the operating system on wh ich the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the execu table. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietar y libraries that do not norma lly accompany the operati ng system. Such a contrad iction means you cann ot use both them and the Library together in an executab le that you distribute. 7. Y ou may place librar y facilities that are a work based on the Librar y side-by-side in a single libra r y togethe r with other librar y facilities not covered by this License, an d distribute such a combined librar y , provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Librar y and of the other librar y facilities is othe r wise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the co mbined librar y with a copy of the same work based on the Library , uncombined with an y other librar y facilities. This must be distri buted under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined librar y of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Librar y , and explaining where to find the accompan ying uncombined form of the same work. 8. Y ou may not copy , modify , sublicense, link with, or dist ribute the Librar y except as expressly provi ded under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy , modify , sublicense, link wi th, or distribute the Library is void, and will autom atically te rminate yo ur righ ts under this License. However , pa rties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this Lice nse will not have their li censes terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 9. Y ou are not required to accept this License, since you hav e not signed it. However , nothing else grants you p e r m i s s i o n t o m o d i f y o r d i s t r i b u t e t h e L ib r a r y o r i t s d e r i v a ti v e w o r k s . T h es e a c t i o n s a r e pr o h i b i t e d b y l a w i f y o u do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Librar y (or any wo rk based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of thi s License to do so, and all its ter ms and conditions for copying, distributing or modif ying the Librar y or works based on it. 10.Each time you redistribute the Librar y (or any work ba sed on the Librar y), the recipient automatically receives a license from the ori ginal licensor to copy , distribute, link with or modify the Librar y subject to these terms and condition s. Y ou may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein . Y ou are not responsible for enforcing co mpliance by th ird parties with this License. 11.If , as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for an y other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (w hether by court order , agreement or otherwise) that contradict t he conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditio ns of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not di stribute the Library at all. F or example, if a patent licen se would not permit royalty-free re distributi on of the Librar y by all those wh o receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and th is License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Librar y . If any portion of this section is held invali d or unenforceable under any particular circumst ance, th e balanc e of the se ction is intende d to apply , and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the pu rpose of this sect ion to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has th e sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public licens e practices. Many people have made generous contribution s to the wide rang e of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent applicatio n of th at system ; it is up to the author donor to d ecide if he or sh e is wil ling to d istribute sof tware through any other sys tem and a licensee cannot impose t hat choice. This section is intended to make thor oughly cl ear what is believed to be a consequenc e of the rest of this License. 12.If the distribution and/or use of the Librar y is restrict ed in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted inter faces, the original copyright holder who place s the Librar y under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution li mitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among count ries not thus exclud ed. In such case, t his Li cen se incorporat es the limita tion as if wr itten in the body of this License. 13.The F ree Sof tware F oundation may publish revised and/ or new versions of the Lesser General P ublic License from time to time. Such new versi ons will be similar in sp irit to the present version , but may differ in detail to address new problems or con cerns. PRO151FD.book Page 159 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
160 En 08 Appendix Each version is given a distinguishi ng version number . If the Librar y specifies a version number of this License which appl ies to it and “ any later vers ion”, you have th e option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version pu blishe d by the F ree Software F oundation. If th e Librar y does not specify a license version number , you may choo se any version ever published by the F ree Software Foundation. 14.If you wish to incorporate parts of the Librar y into other free programs who se distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission . F or sof tware which is copyrighted by the F ree Software F oundation, write to the F ree Software F oundation; we sometime s make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivative s of our free sof tware and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally . NO WARRANTY 15.BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FRE E OF CHARGE, T HERE IS NO W ARRA NTY FOR THE LIBRA RY , TO THE EXTENT PERMIT TED BY APPLIC ABLE LAW . EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE ST A TED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER P ARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “ AS IS” WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, IN CL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QU ALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRAR Y IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, Y OU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REP AIR OR CORRECTION. 16.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE L A W OR AGREED TO IN WR ITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER , OR ANY OTHER P ARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AN D/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMIT TED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO Y OU FOR DAMAGES, INC L UDING ANY GENERAL, SPEC IAL, INCIDENT AL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIB RARY (INCLUDIN G BUT NOT LIMITED TO L OSS OF DA T A OR DA T A BEING RENDERED INACCURA TE OR LOSSES SUST AINED BY YOU OR THIRD P ARTIES OR A FAIL URE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERA TE WITH ANY OTH ER SOF TWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER P ARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These T erms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library , and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that ever yone can redistribute and change. Y ou can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or , alternativ ely , under the terms of the ordi nar y General Public License). T o apply these terms, attach the following notices to the lib rar y . It is sa fest to attach them to th e start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warra n t y; a n d e a c h f i l e s h o u ld h a ve at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to gi ve the librar y ’s name and a bri ef idea of what it does.> Copyright © <year> <name of author> This librar y is free sof tware; you can redistribute it and/or modify it unde r the terms of the GNU Lesser General P ublic License as published by the F ree Sof tware F oundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version . This librar y is distributed in the ho pe that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY ; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANT ABILITY or FITNESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PURP OSE. See the GNU Lesser General P ublic License for more details. Y ou should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this librar y ; if not, write to the F ree Sof tware F oundation, Inc., 51 F ranklin Street, Fif th Floor , Bost on, MA 02110-130 1 USA Also add info rmation on how to c ontact you by electr onic and paper mail. Y ou should also g et your employer (if you w ork as a programmer) or your sc hool, if any , to sign a “copyright disclaimer ” for the librar y , if necessar y . Here is a sample; alter the names: Y oyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all c opyri ght interest in the li brar y ‘F rob’ (a librar y for tweaking knobs) written by James R andom Hacker . <signature of T y Coon>, 1 April 1990 T y Coon, P resident of Vice That’s all there is to it! PRO151FD.book Page 160 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
161 En 08 Appendix [Linux Source Notice] The software programs used on this product include t he Linux operating system. The Linux contains software licensed for use based on the terms of a GNU General Public License. The mach ine readab le copy of the corresponding sour ce code is available f or the cost of distributi on. F or more informat ion or t o obtain a copy , con tact you r local Pioneer Custome r Ser vice center . Details of the GNU General Public License can b e found at the G NU websit e (http://w ww .gnu.org ). PRO151FD.book Page 161 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
162 En 08 Appendix 8.4 Glossary HDMI The High -Definition Multim edia In ter face (HDMI) is a digita l data tran smissio n standard for consu mer electronics/home appliance s. HDMI conn ects digital audio/video sources to a compatible digital audio and/or video device, suc h as a flat panel TV . HDMI also allows digitally transmitted audio and control signals on a single cable for multi-channel digital audio sources. PCM The P ulse Code Modulation (PCM) is a method for converti ng analog audio signals to d igital. PCM is used in music CDs. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is an encoding technolo gy for audio signal co mpressions. Dolby Digital supports high-qua lity , high- compression, multi-channel audio format s. The 5.1-channel surro und format is utilized in di gital broadca sts. High-Definition Broadcast A digital television broa dcasting system with greater reso lution than tradit ional television syst ems. As compared with the existing terrestrial analog broadcasti ng system capable of producin g an image composed of 525 lines of resolution, the digital high-definition broadcasting syst em features 750 or 1125 lines, thus providing higher definition a nd quality image. Interlaced Scanning In NTSC television or video image display , interlaced sca nning first redraws every second line of the image field (262.5 lines) per each image refresh in 1/60 of a second, then the remaining lines with a second refresh in 1/60 of a second for a complete frame of an image (525 lines) . Effective scanning lines ar e expressed as “480i” and “1080i” (“i” stands for “ interlaced”). Progressive Scanning The progressive scanning redraws an image frame (all of its lines) in order per each image refresh. Compared to interlaced scanning, progressive scanning produces less flicker , making it su itable for displaying text and still images. Effective scanning li nes are expressed as “480p” and “720 p” (“p” stands for “progressive”). (Home Media Gallery) Default Gatew ay Default gateway is a node on a computer net work that se r v es as an access point to an other network. A default gateway (such as a computer and router) is u sed to for ward all traf fic that is not add ressed to a station withi n the local subnet. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server P rovides a mechanism to allocat e IP addresses to client hosts. In most cases, a br oadba nd router serves as a DHCP ser ver in a ho me network. DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) The DLNA autho rized logo makes it easy for co nsumers to reco gnize products that meet the ne w standard for home netw ork PCs and ot her digital de vices, as se t down in the DLNA Guidelines for interoperability . This allows music, video , etc. to be enjoy ed from various devices ov er a home netwo rk. This unit is compatible with music, photo and video content, an d is based on the DLNA Home Networked Device Interoperability Gui delines - expanded: October 2006 (v1.5). This unit can be used to playback music, photos an d video stored on a DLNA- compatible se r ver conne cted through a LAN cable. Digital Living Network Al liance (DLNA) is dedicated to the simpl ified sharing of digital content, such as digital music, photos and vid eo among network ed consumer elec tronics (CE) and PCs. By es tablishing a platform of interoperability based on open indust r y standards, DLNA delivers techni cal design guideline s that companies can use to develop digital home pro duc ts that shar e content through wired or wireless networks in the home. DNS (Domain Name Se rvice) Server DNS Ser ver is a ser ver that determines the name of ne twork-computer within the Internet. The ser ver functions to exchange IP address to the host nam e, hostname to the IP address. Ethernet A frame-based computer networki ng technology for local area networks (LANs). Th e flat panel TV supports 100BASE- TX. PRO151FD.book Page 162 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
163 En 08 Appendix IP (Internet Protocol) Address A unique number that devices use in order to identif y and communicate with each other on a network u tilizing the Internet P rotocol standard, such as “192.168.1.xxx”. No du plicate numbers are allo wed within the network. LAN Cable A cable that h as an eight-pin modular plug on each end and is different fr om a telephone plug which has four pins. A strai ght cable is used w hen co nnecting the fla t panel TV to a home network via a hu b. A cross-over cable is used when connecting directly to a PC. Use categor y 5 (CA T -5) L AN cables. MAC (Media Access Control) Address An address attached to the port of any network device with an IP address. The MAC addres s is expressed as “00:e0:36:01:23:xx” and cannot be changed. Mass Storage Class Devices The standard provides an interface to a variety of storage devices, such as USB flash drive and digital camer as. PlaysForSure PlaysF orSure is a marketing ce rtification given by Microsoft. This unit complies with PlaysF orSure Versi on 2.20 Requirements Speci fication for Network Devices. PTP (Picture T ransfer Pr otocol) A protocol that allows the transfer of ima ges and manipulation of digital cameras through U SB connection . Most recent digital cameras and other devices support PTP allowing the trans fer of images through direct connections. Subnet Mask Used to determine the etwork when I P addresses are broken into several parts. It is expressed as “255.255.255.0” . In most cases, the Subnet mask is auto matically assigned by the DHCP ser ver . UPnP (Universal Plug a nd Play) Architecture for per vasive peer-to-peer network connectivity of devices of all form factors. It is design ed to bring easy-to-use, flexible, standa rd based connectivity to ad-hoc or unman aged networks whether in the home, in a small business, public spaces, or attached to the Internet. USB (Universal Serial Bus) USB provides a serial bus stan dard for connecting devices, usually to compu ters such as PCs. The flat panel T V supports the Mass Storage Class and PTP (P icture T ransfer Protocol) devices. Windows Media Connect Microsoft Windows Media Co nnect is a new technology to distribute music, photos a nd video stored on a PC with Windows XP instal led to a stereo system of TV . Using this technology you can playback files stored on the PC from various devices wherever you like in your home. Windows Media DRM Wind ows Media DRM is copyright pro tection technology de velope d by Microsof t Corporation. It enables content providers to distribute over the Internet music, vi deo and other digital me dia content in a protected, encr ypte d file format. Windows Media Player A free digital media pl ayer application provided by Microsoft that is us ed for playing audio, vide o and images on PCs. Windows Media Player 11 The function ality of Wi ndows Media Conne ct has been integr ated into this version of Windows Media Player . After installing Windows Media Player 11 Windows Media Co nnect wi ll not function. See Microsof t’s website for details. PRO151FD.book Page 163 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
164 En 08 Appendix 8.5 Index Numerics 100BASE-TX ........................ ......................... ......................... 95, 162 10BASE-T .................. .................... .................... .................... ........ 95 2-screen .................... .................... .................... .......... 12, 13, 69, 70 A Air/Cable ................... .................... .................... .................... ........ 38 Analog .................. .................... .................... ......... 46, 72, 74, 84, 85 Analog TV Setup ........................... .................... ................ 39, 41, 46 Auto Installation ................. .................... ......................... ....... 38, 41 Auto Size ......... .................... .................... .................... ...... 55, 59, 62 AV Selection ....................... .................... .................... ............ 57, 58 AVC .................. ......................... .................... .................... ....... 49, 75 B Balance ................ .................... .................... .................... . 36, 49, 60 Bass ................ ......................... .................... .................... ............. 36 Block .................... ......................... .................... .............. 52, 5 4, 123 Blue ................. .................... .................... .................... ...... 36, 61, 73 Blue LED Dimmer .... .................... .................... .................... .. 34, 46 Brightness ................ .................... .................... ................ 48, 58, 61 Brightness Sync ..................................... .................... .......... 63, 126 C Canadian English Ratings ........... ......................... ....................... 52 Canadian French Ratings ............ ......................... ....................... 52 CBL .................. ......................... .................... .................... ....... 12, 81 Change Password .................................. .................... ............ 36, 50 Channel ................ ......................... .................... ................ 38, 41, 44 Channel Mode .............................. ......................... ................. 36, 42 Clock .................... ......................... .................... .................... 38, 122 Closed Captions ........................... .................... .................... .. 72, 73 Color ................ ......................... .................... .................... . 45, 48, 61 Color Sensor ................................. .................... ...................... 27, 45 Contrast ............... ......................... .................... .................... .. 46, 61 D Digital ................... .................... .................... .................... . 29, 35, 53 Digital Tuner Setup ................. ......................... .............. 38, 41, 130 Dolby Digital ............. .................... .................... .......... 121, 145, 165 E Energy Save .... .................... .................... ......................... . 55, 56, 76 F Favorites .................... .................... .................... .................... .. 36, 43 Favorites Sort ...................... ......................... ......................... .. 36, 43 Film Mode ........................... .................... .................... .................. 63 Freeze .............. ......................... .................... .................... ..... 70, 1 31 G GAME ............................. .................... ................... 31, 57, 59, 64, 92 Game Control Pref ............. .................... ......................... ....... 59, 64 Green .................... .................... .................... .................... . 61, 73, 83 H H/V Position Adjust ................. ......................... ......................... ... 47 HD Wide Mode ................... .................... .................... .................. 62 HDMI Control . .................... .................... ......................... . 84, 86, 88 HDMI Control Setting ... .................... .................... ................. 87, 91 HDMI Input ............... .................... .................... .............. 84, 85, 124 HDMI terminal .................... ......................... ............. 30, 84, 86, 126 Home Media Gallery ............... .................... ......................... ........ 93 HOME MENU ..................... .................... .................... ............ 12, 37 I InfoBanner ........... .................... .................... .................... ............. 71 Input ................ .................... .................... .................... ............ 12, 43 Installation ...... ......................... .................... ................... 14, 38, 131 IR REPEATER OUT ................................. ......................... ............. 92 L Label ................ .................... .................... .................... .................. 43 Label Input .............................. ......................... ......................... .... 43 Language ........................... .................... ............... 37, 38, 73, 74, 86 M Manual Adjust ........................ .................... .................... ........ 39, 46 MOVIE ................. ......................... .................... ................. 12, 47, 57 MPAA .................. ......................... .................... .................... . 51, 136 MTS ................ ......................... .................... .................... ........ 72, 7 4 Multi-screen .................. ......................... .................... ....... 59, 69, 70 MUTING .................... ......................... .................... .................. 13, 44 N No Operation off ............................... .................... .................... .... 76 No Signal Off .......................... .................... .................... .............. 76 O OPTIMUM ................ ......................... .................... ............ 12, 48, 57 Orbiter ............ .................... .................... .................... ........... 56, 133 P Parental Control ............................... ........................ 50, 51, 53, 123 PCM ................ ......................... .................... .................... ...... 84, 121 PERFORMANCE ................ .................... .................... ............. 12, 57 Picture-in-picture ........................ ......................... ............ 12, 13, 69 Position .................... .................... .................... .................... . 47, 122 Power .................. ......................... .................... ................. 34, 56, 76 Power Control .............................. .................... .................... ......... 92 Power Management .................... .................... .................... ......... 77 Pro Adjust ................ .................... .................... .................... ......... 62 R RCV ................. ......................... .................... .................... .............. 12 Red ................. .................... .................... .................... ............. 61, 73 Remote Control .. ......................... ......................... ............ 10, 12, 7 8 Room Light Sensor ...... ......................... ......................... .............. 45 S SAP ................. ......................... .................... .................... ........ 72, 74 SAT ................. ......................... .................... .................... ........ 12, 81 Screen Protection ........ .................... .................... .. 36, 55, 124, 13 3 SCREEN SIZE ................................... .................... .................. 1 3, 59 Sharpness ................ .................... .................... .................... ......... 61 SHIFT ................... ......................... .................... ................. 13, 69, 7 0 Side Mask ........... .................... .................... .................... .. 55, 62, 63 Side Mask Detection ................... .................... .................... . 62, 133 Sleep Timer ............................. ......................... .................... . 44, 125 Sound ................................. ......................... ................ 45, 49, 5 7, 72 Sound Effect ...................... .................... .................... ........... 75, 145 SPORT ................. ......................... .................... .................... ... 12, 57 SRS ................................ .................... .................... ........ 75, 145, 16 5 SRS Definition .... .................... .................... .................... ............ 145 SRS FOCUS ........ .................... .................... ......................... ....... 145 SRS TruBASS .......... .................... .................... .................... ....... 145 STANDARD ................... ......................... .................... ............. 12, 58 Standard ............. .................... .................... ......................... ... 12, 57 SWAP .................. ......................... .................... ................. 13, 69, 7 0 System Setup ................ .................... .................... .................... .... 37 T Text Optimization ............................. ......................... ................... 63 Time Zone .................................... .................... .................... ......... 38 Tint .................. ......................... .................... .................... ........ 58, 6 1 Treble ................... ......................... .................... .................... ......... 49 TV Parental Guidelines .................... .................... ............ 51, 52, 53 TV/DTV ................. ......................... .................... ................. 13, 29, 35 U Unavailable Ratings .......... ......................... .................... .............. 52 USER ................... ......................... .................... .................... ... 12, 58 V VOLUME ................... ......................... .................... .................. 4 4, 75 PRO151FD.book Page 164 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
165 En Appendix 08 8.6 Trademarks, Licenses, & Patent Information Trademarks i s a trademark o f SRS Labs, Inc. WOW HD technology is incorporated under licens e from SRS Labs, Inc. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolb y and the double -D symbol are tr ademarks of Dolb y Laboratories. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Inter f ace ar e trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. This product includes F ontAvenue ® fonts licensed by NEC Co rporation. F ontAvenue is a regi stered trademark of NEC Corporation. DDC is a registered trad emark of Vi deo Electronics Standards Assoc iation. This software is based in part on th e work of the independent JPEG Group. The names of the companies or institutions are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies or institutions. Windows Media and the W indows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or se r vice marks of Digital Li ving Network Alli ance. License Content owners use Windows Media digital rights management technology (WMDRM) to protect their in tellect ual property , including copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software to access WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask Microsof t to re voke the sof tware’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content. Revocation does not af fect unprotected content. When you downlo ad licenses for protected content, you agree that Microsoft may include a revocati on list with the licenses. Content owne rs may require you to upgrade WMDRM to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to ac cess cont ent that requires the upgrade. This product is protected by certain intell ectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited with out a license from Microsoft. The DLNA logo is permitted to the product that has obtained a DLNA (Digit al Living Network Alliance) cer tificate. Disclaimer Notice P ioneer provides information to help in se tting up a network and connecting the flat pa nel TV to the network, but you are solel y responsible for proper network setup and the connection. P ioneer bears no responsib ility whatsoever for any damage arising from the network setup and the connection you made. When downloading software updates from the Pioneer websit e and per forming updating proc edures, make sure that your connections from the network to your USB flash drive, and from your USB flash driv e to the flat panel TV are uninterrupted. P ioneer bears no responsibility for any failure s or damage resulting from connection problems. Content may not work properly de pending on the USB device used. Pioneer assu mes no responsibility whatsoever for any failures or damage resulting from the USB device used by the user . PRO151FD.book Page 165 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
Should this product requi re se r vice in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nea rest P ionee r Autho rized Inde pendent Se r vice Com pany, o r if you wish to p ur chase r ep lacement p ar ts, op er ating instr uctions, ser vice manuals, or accessor ies, p lease call the number shown below . 8 0 0 – 4 2 1 – 1 6 2 5 Please do not shi p you r product to P ionee r without fi rst calling the Custome r Su ppo rt Division at the above listed numbe r fo r assistance. P ionee r Elect ronics (USA) Inc. Custome r Su ppo rt Division P .O . BOX 1760, Long Beach, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A. Fo r wa rranty info rmation please see the Limited W a rranty sheet included with you r product. Should this product requi re se r vice in Canada, please contact a P ionee r Canadian Autho rized Deale r to locate the nea rest P ionee r Autho rized Se r vice Com pany in Canada. Alte rnatively , please contact the Custome r Satisfaction De pa rtment at the following add ress: P ionee r Elect ronics of Canada, Inc. Custome r Satisfaction De pa rtment 300 Allstate P a rkway , Ma rkham, Onta rio L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 Fo r wa rranty info rmation please see the Limited W a rranty sheet included with you r product. Si ce produit doit êt re ré pa ré au Canada, veuillez vous ad resse r à un dist ributeu r auto risé P ionee r du Canada pou r obteni r le nom du Cent re de Se r vice Auto risé P ionee r le p lus pr ès de chez-vous. V ous pouvez aussi contacte r le Se r vice à la clientèle de Pionee r : P ionee r Élect roniques du Canada, Inc. Se r vice Clientèle 300, Allstate P a rkway , Ma rkham, Onta rio L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 Po u r obtenir des r enseignements sur la gar antie, veuillez vous r ep or ter au feuillet sur la gar antie r estr einte qui accomp agne le pr oduit. S018_B_EF PRO151FD.book Page 167 Thursday , July 10, 2008 3:58 PM
<ARB1579-C> Printed in China Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright © 2008 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En Register Your Product on http://www.pioneerelectronics.com (US) http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca (Canada)